Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats

CA JyiLOG 1990 - 199} \

rBfii>'''i" '■, ' i:i;iiiniiin

j,iL.i

rf;*'':

M;:.

W ""'.

Ihll^t';

\:mm

"^.Ms'^i

Contents

Welcome to Lycoming 3

The Academic Program 5

The Curriculum 23

Student Services 67

Admission 69

Financial Matters 72

The Campus 78

Academic Calendar, 1990-1991 80

Directory 81

Administrative Staff/Faculty 82

The Alumni Association 92

Index 93

The general regulations and policies staled in this catalog are in effect for the 1990-91 academic year. Students
beginning their first term at Lycoming College in the fall of 1990 or the spring of 1991 are thereafter governed
by the policies stated in this catalog. Requirements governing a student's major are those in effect at the
lime a major is formally declared and officially accepted by the major department.

If changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog to either general requirements or major requirements,
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version,
but the College always reserves the right to determine which requirements apply.

If a student interrupts his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in effect
at the time of readmission will apply. Students on an approved leave of absence retain the same requirements
they had when they entered, if their leaves do not e.ftend beyond one year.

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and procedures stated in this catalog
without prior notice to those who may be affected by them. The provision of this publication are not to
be regarded as an irrevocable contract between the applicant and/or the student and Lycoming College.

Communicating with Lycoming College

Please address specific inquiries as follows:

Director of Admissions;

Admissions; requests for publications

Treasurer:

Payment of bills; expenses

Director of Financial Aid:

Scholarships and loan fund; financial assistance

Dean of College:

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities

Dean of Student Services:

Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services;
academic support services

Registrar:

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies

Career Development Center:

Career counseling; employment opportunities

Executive Director for College Advancement:
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations:
Alumni information; parent support

Director of Public and Media Relations:

Public information; publications; sports information; media relations

All correspondence should be addressed to:
Lycoming College
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701

The College telephone number is (717) 321-4000

Visitors

Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour,
call the Office of Admissions (717) 321-4126 before your visit to arrange a
mutually convenient time.

Toll Free Number 1-800-345-3920

Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age, sex, race,
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color. Lycoming does not discriminate on the
basis of age, sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the
administration of any of its policies and programs.

Welcome to Lycoming

Lycoming is an independent, coeduca-
tional college dedicated to providing the
type of learning that can be used for a
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences.

Lycoming's academic relevance
derives from its enduring commitment to
the value of this type of education, as
offered by a superior teaching faculty.
The College's principal aim is to help
students develop a central core of inte-
grated values, skill, information, and
strategies while they learn to communi-
cate, reason, make decisions, under-
stand, and use their imagination. This
type of education can lead to productive
and fulfilling lives in many fields while
allowing lifelong growth and develop-
ment.

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts
degrees in 31 major fields, a bachelor of
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a
bachelor of science degree in nursing.
The curriculum is challenging. Because
it is built upon the two principles of the

liberal arts known as distribution and
concentration, it allows students to study
in breadth and depth.

Students who have special interests
not met entirely by a major field can
design their own majors. Or, if they are
interested in teaching, medicine, law,
dentistry, or the ministrv', they can take
courses needed to enter their advanced
study.

Students also can study engineering,
forestry or environmental studies,
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical
technology, and sculpture through
cooperative programs operated by
Lycoming with other colleges and uni-
versities. Or, they can study abroad or in
Philadelphia, Pa., Washington. D.C.. or
New York City through other off-
campus study programs.

Most students complete their program
of study in four years, usually by taking
four courses each fall and spring semes-
ter. But students also can take one course

LYCOMING
COLLEGE

during Lycoming's May term, or two
courses during the summer term.

Recognizing students' concerns about
careers, Lycoming offers extensive
counseling through the Career Develop-
ment Center and advisory committees for
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre-
medical students. The College also oper-
ates a wide-ranging internship program
that allows students to earn academic
credit while working at area businesses,
government offices, and nonprofit orga-
nizations.

Lycoming's ratio of students to faculty
is 15 to one. which means that most
classes are small and there is abundant
opportunity for individual attention. All
faculty members teach. More than 70
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the
highest degrees in their fields from the
nation's outstanding colleges and univer-
sities. And. faculty members take their
advising seriously. They care about stu-
dents, and encourage and guide them so
they receive the education they want.

Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
main campus. Most of them have been
built since 1950. The modern buildings
include the eight residence halls; the
library; the Academic Center, which
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium,
computer center, and art gallery; the
student union; the physical education/
recreation center, including a six-lane,
25-yard pool; a completely renovated
fine arts center with excellent facilities
to accommodate sculpture, painting,
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and
photography; and a music building,
which houses individual music practice
rooms and an electronic-music studio.

Opened this past spring, the $8.3
million Science Building is one of the
finest undergraduate science facilities
in the East. The three-level building
totals more than 63,000 square feet
and contains state-of-the-art biology
and chemistry laboratories, lecture and
seminar rooms, a science reading area
and a greenhouse, as well as classrooms
and faculty offices.

Lycoming houses approximately 900
of its 1,250 students in the residence
halls, which include double and single
rooms. Most students find the campus

friendly and comfortable, with all of the
buildings easy to reach from anywhere
on campus. Students come from a variety
of economic classes, religious beliefs,
and geographic areas, although most stu-
dents call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or
New York their home. They work and
play together in an atmosphere of respect
and tolerance.

The College offers a variety of extra-
curricular activities. Recent Artist Series
events have included the Broadway
Musicals Big River and The Mystery of
Edwin Drood, Pilobolus Dance Theatre,
The Northeastern Philharmonic, Intimate
P.D.Q. Bach, and The New York City
Opera National Company. Admission
to all Artist Series events is free for
Lycoming students. Student government
groups help to plan campus activities and
social events. Numerous clubs, honor
societies, social fraternities and sorori-
ties, the student newspaper, yearbook
and literary magazine, and the band
and widely acclaimed choir meet other
student interests. Students who like to
perform or compete can act on the Arena
Theatre stage or play on intercollegiate
or intramural sports teams. Intercol-
legiate teams for men include football,
soccer, basketball, wrestling, tennis.

golf, swimming, track and field, and
cross country. Intercollegiate teams for
women include basketball, tennis, field
hockey, swimming, track and field, cross
country, and Softball.

In addition, students who like hiking,
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing,
hunting, kayaking, spelunking, and
other outdoor sports will find Lycom-
ing's location ideal.

Lycoming is situated on a slight
prominence near downtown Williams-
port, a small city nestled along the West
Branch of the Susquehanna River in
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills
and valleys. Yet, the College is within a
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers
such as New York City, Philadelphia,
Pittsburgh, Washington, D.C., Balti-
more, Syracuse, Rochester, and the New
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport-
metro area is home to about 75 ,000 per-
sons.

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with
The United Methodist Church. It sup-
ports the Methodist tradition of provid-
ing an education for persons of all faiths.

Fully accredited. Lycoming is a mem-
ber of the Middle States Association of
Colleges and Schools, and the University
Senate of The United Methodist Church.

It is a member of the Association of
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania
Association of Colleges and Universi-
ties, the Commission for Independent
Colleges and Universities, the National
Commission on Accrediting, and the
National Association of Schools and
Colleges of The United Methodist
Church.

HISTORY

Lycoming College was founded in 1812
as the Williamsport Academy, an
elementary and secondary school.
Thirty-six years later, the academy
became the Williamsport Dickinson
Seminary under the patronage of The
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi-
nary operated as a private boarding
school until 1929, when a college curri-
culum was added and it became the Wil-
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col-
lege became a four-year degree-granting
college of liberal arts and sciences. It
adopted the name Lycoming, derived
from the Indian word "lacomic,"
meaning "Great Stream." The word
Lycoming has been common to north-
central Pennsylvania since colonial days.

Academic Program

THE BACHELOR OF
ARTS DEGREE

Lycoming is committed to the principle
that a liberal arts education is the best
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con-
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is
conferred upon the student who has
completed an educational program
incorporating the two principles of the
liberal arts known as distribution and
concentration. The objective of the dis-
tribution principle is to insure that the
student achieves breadth in learning
through the study of the major dimen-
sions of human inquiry: the humanities,
the social sciences, and the natural sci-
ences. The objective of the concentra-
tion principle is to provide depth of
learning through completion of a pro-
gram of study in a given discipline or
subject area known as the major.

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE

Every degree candidate is expected to
complete the following requirements in
order to qualify for graduation:

— complete the distribution program.

— complete a major consisting of at
least eight courses while achieving
a minimum grade point average of
2.0 in those courses.

— earn one year of credit in physical
education. Athletic training
courses may count towards this
requirement. All students must
demonstrate competence in swim-
ming. (Medical exemptions may
be granted by the College physi-
cian after an examination and
review of the student's medical
history and family physician's
report.)

— pass a minimum of 32 units ( 1 28
semester hours) with a minimum
cumulative average of 2.0. Addi-
tional credits beyond 128 semester
hours may be completed provided
the minimum 2.0 cumulative aver-
age is maintained.

— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the
degree at Lycoming.

— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.

— complete the above requirements
within seven years of continuous
enrollment following the date of
matriculation.

All exemptions or waivers of specific
requirements are made by the Commit-
tee on Academic Standards.

THE BACHELOR OF
FINE ARTS DEGREE

The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci-
fically designed to train professional
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a syn-
thesis of three diverse forms of education:
a studio art program that emphasizes
the skills and concepts of the visual
language, an apprenticeship that takes
technical expertise as the departure point,
and the scholastic method employed
in both art history and the general-
education component.

REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE BACHELOR OF
FINE ARTS DEGREE

Every BFA degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements
in order to qualify for graduation:

— complete the 12-course Art De-
partment course of study, while
achieving a minimum grade point
average of 2.0 in these courses.

— complete the distribution pro-
gram.

— pass a minimum of 32 units (128
semester hours) with a minimum
cumulative average of 2.0 in
these courses.

— complete one of the field speciali-
zation apprenticeships at the John-
son Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture.

review of the student's medical
history and family physician's
report.)

— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the
degree at Lycoming.

— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.

— have a public exhibition of origi-
nal art work and make an oral
defense.

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE
IN NURSING DEGREE

The program of study leading to the
bachelor of science in nursing degree is
designed to prepare men and women as
beginning practitioners of professional
nursing', qualified for first-level posi-
tions in a variety of health settings and
for graduate study in nursing. Upon
satisfactory completion of the program,
a graduate is eligible to write the State
Board of Nursing examination for licen-
sure as a registered nurse. The goal of
the program is to develop a liberally
educated and self-directed individual
who is prepared to contribute to the wel-
fare of the nation through the practice of
professional nursing which supports the
promotion and restoration of health of
individuals and families in a variety of
settings.

REQUIREMENTS FOR

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

IN NURSING DEGREE

Every BSN degree candidate is expected
to complete the following requirements
in order to qualify for graduation:

— complete the 13-course major with
a minimum cumulative average of
2.0, including the required May
term following the junior year.

— complete the distribution require-
ments for the BSN degree.

— complete a minimum of 32 units
(128 semester hours) with a mini-
mum cumulative average of 2.0.

— earn one year of credit in physical
education. Athletic training
courses may count towards this
requirement. All students must

demonstrate competence in swim-
ming. (Medical exemptions may
be granted by the College physi-
cian after an examination and
review of the student's medical
history and family physician's
report.)

— complete in residence the final
eight courses offered for the
degree at Lycoming.

— satisfy all financial obligations
incurred at the College.

— complete the degree requirements
within a five-year period after
admission to the nursing major.
Candidates who are unable to meet
this requirement must petition for
an extension.

WRITING ACROSS

THE CURRICULUM PROGRAM

L Purpose

The Lycoming College Writing
Across the Curriculum Program has
been developed in response to the con-
viction that writing skill promotes intel-
lectual growth and is a hallmark of the
educated person. The program has
therefore been designed to achieve two
major, interrelated objectives:

( 1) to enhance student learning in
general and subject mastery in parti-
cular, and

(2) to develop students' abilities to
communicate clearly. In this pro-
gram students are given opportuni-
ties to write in a variety of contexts
and in a substantial number of
courses, in which they receive
faculty guidance and reinforcement.

IL Program Requirements

In order to graduate from Lycoming
all students must complete the following
writing requirements:

A. English 049 (Developmental
Reading and Writing) or exemption
from the course.

B. English 106 (Composition) and
one other English course.

C. A writing component in all dis-
tribution courses completed at
Lycoming.

D. Two courses designated as
writing-intensive, or" W" courses.

(1) Successful completion of
English 106 is a prerequisite
for enrollment in writing-
intensive courses.

(2) All courses designated "W"
are numbered 200 or above.

(3) Each student must complete
one "W" course from
among those offered by the
major department, or. with
departmental approval, from
a related department. The
other "W" course com-
pleted must be from a depart-
ment other than the major
department. In the case of
students with multiple
majors, one "W" course
must be completed from one
of those majors. The second
course may be taken in one
of the student's other majors.

(4) Students should take one
"W" course during the
sophomore year and one
during the junior year —
though other sequences are
possible and may in certain
circumstances be advisable.

(5) A writing intensive course
may not duplicate a course
taken to satisfy II. B.

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM

A course can be used to satisfy only one
distribution requirement. Courses for
which a grade of "P" is recorded may
not be used toward the fulfillment of the
distribution requirements. (Refer to
page 10 for an explanation of the grad-
ing system.) A course in any of the fol-
lowing distribution requirements refers
to a full-unit (four semester hours)
course taken at Lycoming, any appro-
priate combination of fractional unit
courses taken at Lycoming which accu-
mulate to four semester hours, or any
single course of three or more semester
hours transferred from another institu-
tion. For the BSN degree, see special
modified distribution requirements on
page 7.

English — Students are required to
demonstrate competence in basic writing
skills and to pass English 106 and one
other unit of English. Competence in
basic writing skills may be demonstrated
either by passing the Achievement Exami-
nation in English Composition or by
earning a Pass in English 049. A student
must demonstrate this competence before
being permitted to enroll in English 106.
Unless impossible because of failure to
complete English 049, English 106 must
be taken during the freshman year;
English 106 or consent of instructor is
required before enrolling in any other
English course. Students may choose any
course from the department's offerings
to satisfy the requirement for another
unit in English.

Foreign Language or Mathematics

— Students are required to meet a mini-
mum basic requirement in either a fore-
ign language or the mathematical sci-
ences.

Foreign Language. Students may
choose from among French, German, or
Spanish and are required to pass two
courses on the intermediate or higher
course level. Placement at the appropri-
ate course level will be determined by the
faculty of the Department of Foreign
Languages and Literatures. Students
who have completed two or more years
of a given language in high school are
not admitted for credit to the elementary
course in the same foreign language
except by written permission of the
chairman of the department. French 228
and Spanish 331 will meet part of this
requirement only if the section taught in
the language is completed.

Mathematics. Students are required to
demonstrate competence in basic algeb-
ra and to pass three units of Mathemati-
cal science other than Mathematics 005.
Competence in basic algebra may be
demonstrated either by passing the basic
algebra section of the Mathematics
Placement Examination or by passing
Mathematics 005. By demonstrating
higher competence on the Mathematics
Placement Examination, students may
reduce the requirement to two units of

mathematical science. No more than
one unit may be taken in computer sci-
ence.

Religion or Philosophy — Students
are required to pass two courses in either
religion or philosophy. Any two religion
courses may be used to fulfill the
philosophy/religion distribution require-
ment, with this exception: only one
course from the combination Religion
120-121 may be selected for distribu-
tion.

Fine Arts — Students are required to
pass two courses as indicated in art, lit-
erature, music, or theatre.

Art. Any two courses.

Literature. Any two literature courses
selected from the offerings of the
Departments of English and Foreign
Languages and Literatures (French,
German, or Spanish).

Music. Any combination of eight (8)
credits, including applied music,
ensemble, and music department
courses.

Theatre. The fine arts distribution
requirement may be satisfied by select-
ing any two of the following recom-
mended courses: Theatre 100, 1 10, 140,
148, 332, 333, or other courses with the
consent of the instructor.

Natural Science — Students are
required to pass any two courses as
indicated in one of the following
disciplines: astronomy and physics,
except Astr 114 and 115; biology;
or chemistry.

History and Social Science — Students
are required to pass two courses as indi-
cated in economics, history, political
science, psychology, or sociology/
anthropology.

Economics. Any two courses.

History. Any two courses, except
History 222.

Political Science. Any two courses.

Psychology. Psychology 1 10 and one
other course, except Psychology 101.

Sociology/ Anthropology. Sociology/
Anthropology 1 10 plus another course.

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM
FOR THE BSN DEGREE

English — Same as B.A. degree.
Mathematical Sciences — compe-
tence in basic algebra as demon-
strated by completion of, or
exemption from Math 005; Mathe-
matics 103; and Computer Science
108. 125, or Mathematics 214.
Religion and Philosophy — Relig-
ion 120 and Philosophy 219.
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two
courses from one department as
follows;

Art — any two (2) courses
Literature — any two literature
courses selected from the depart-
ments of English and Foreign
Languages and Literatures
Music — any combination of eight
(8) credits, including applied
music, ensemble, and music
department courses
Theatre — any two (2) courses
from among Theatre 100, 110,
140, 148, 332, 333, or other
courses with the consent of the
instructor
Language — any two (2) courses at
the intermediate or higher level.
No student who has had two or
more years of a given foreign
language in high school shall be
admitted to the elementary
courses in that same language
for credit, except by written per-
mission of the chairman of the
department.
Natural Science — Chemistry 108.

115
Social Science — Psychology 1 10
and 1 17; Sociology and anthropol-
ogy — one from among Soc 1 10,
1 14, 220, 222, 224. 227, 228, 229,
331. 334, and 335.

THE MAJOR

Students are required to complete a
series of courses in one departmental or
interdisciplinary (established or individ-
ual) major. Specific course require-
ments for each major offered by the

College are listed in the curriculum sec-
tion of this catalog. Students must earn a
2.0 or higher grade-point average in
those courses stipulated as comprising
the major. Students must declare a major
by the beginning of their junior year.
Departmental and established interdis-
ciplinary majors are declared in the
Office of the Registrar, whereas indi-
vidual interdisciplinary majors must
be approved by the Committee on Cur-
riculum Development. Students may
complete more than one major, each of
which will be recorded on the transcript.
Students may be removed from major
status if they are not making satisfactory
progress in the major. This action is
taken by the Dean of the College upon
the recommendation of the department,
coordinating committee (for established
interdisciplinary majors), or Curriculum
Development Committee (for individual
interdisciplinary majors). The decision of
the Dean of the College may be appealed
to the Academic Standards Committee
by the student involved or the recom-
mending department or committee.

Departmental Majors — Departmental

majors are available in the following

areas;

Accounting

Art History

Art Studio

Astronomy

Biology

Business Administration

Chemistry

Computer Science

Economics

English

Foreign Languages, and Literatures

French, German, Spanish
History

Mass Communication
Mathematics
Music
Nursing
Philosophy
Physics

Political Science
Psychology
Religion

Sociology/ Anthropology
Theatre

Established Interdisciplinary Majors

— a minor must include at least

BIOLOGY

— The following established interdis-

two courses which are not counted

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

ciplinary majors include course work in

in the student's major.

Marketing

two or more departments:

— a student may receive at most two

Finance

minors.

CHEMISTRY

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences

— students with two majors may

ECONOMICS

American Studies

receive only one minor; students

ENGLISH

Criminal Justice

with three majors may not receive

Literature

International Studies

a minor.

Writing

Literature

— students may not receive a minor

FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND

Near East Culture and Archaeology

in their major discipline unless

LITERATURES

their major discipline is Art and

French

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors

the minor is Art History. (A dis-

German

— Students may design a major that is

cipline is any course of study in

Spanish

unique to their needs and objectives and

which a student can major. Tracks

HISTORY

which combines course work in more

within majors are not separate dis-

American History

than one department. This major is

ciplines.)

European History

developed in consultation with the stu-

— a student may not receive a minor

History

dent's faculty advisor and with a panel

unless his average in the courses

MASS COMMUNICATION

of faculty members from each of the

which count for his minor is a

MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

sponsoring departments. The applica-

minimum of 2.00.

Computer Science

tion is acted upon by the Curriculum

— courses taken P/F may not be

Mathematics

Development Committee. The major

counted toward a minor.

PHILOSOPHY

normally consists of 10 courses beyond

Philosophy

those taken to satisfy the distribution

Students must declare their intention to

Philosophy and Law

requirements. Students are expected to

minor by signing a form available in the

Philosophy and Science

complete at least six courses at the

Registrar's Office, getting required

The History of Philosophy

junior or senior level. Examples of indi-

faculty signatures, and returning the

POLITICAL SCIENCE

vidual interdisciplinary majors are

completed form to the Records Room.

Political Science

Racial and Cultural Minorities, Illustra-

When students complete a minor, the

Foreign Affairs

tion in the Print Medium, Environmen-

title will be indicated on their official

Legal Studies

tal Law, Advertising, Art/Business,

transcript. Students must meet the

PSYCHOLOGY

Human Behavior, and Images of Man.

requirements for the minor which are in

RELIGION

effect at the time they declare a minor or

SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY

Major in Sculpture Leading to

which are in effect subsequent to that

THEATRE

Bachelor of Fine Arts Degree —

time and before they graduate.

Theatre History & Literature

Through a cooperative program with the

Performance

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of

Departmental Minors — Require-

Technical Theatre

Sculpture, Mercerville, New Jersey,

ments for a departmental minor vary

students may earn a BFA degree in

from department to department. Stu-

Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis-

sculpture. The major consists of a core

dents interested in pursuing a depart-

ciplinary minors include coursework in

academic program, a course of study in

mental minor should consult that depart-

two or more departments. Students

art, elective courses, and an apprentice-

ment for its policy regarding minors.

interested in interdisciplinary minors

ship at the Johnson Atelier.

Departmental minors are available in

should consult the faculty coordinator of

the following areas:

that minor. Interdisciplinary minors are

ACCOUNTING

available in the following areas: BIBLI-

Financial Accounting

CAL LANGUAGES, CRIMINAL JUS-

THE MINOR

Managerial Accounting

TICE, MASS COMMUNICATION,

Federal Income Tax

and WOMEN'S STUDIES.

The College awards two kinds of

ART

minors, departmental and interdisciplin-

Art History

ary, in recognition of concentrated

Commercial Design

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT

course work in an area other than the

Painting

student's major. All minors are subject

Photography

One advantage of a small college is the

to the following limitations:

Sculpture

direct, personal contact between a stu-

dent and his or her college instructors
who care about that student's personal,
academic, and professional aspirations.
The student can draw upon their years of
experience to resolve questions about so-
cial adjustment, workload, study skills,
tutoring, and more. Perhaps the member
of the faculty with the most impact on a
student is the academic advisor.

The freshman advisor, whom the stu-
dent meets at summer orientation, assists
with course selection by providing accu-
rate information about requirements and
programs and with personal adjustment
by helping the student recognize his or
her own goals. In addition, the advisor
will refer students to other campus re-
sources whenever the need is apparent.

During the student's sophomore year,
he or she will choose a major and select
an advisor from the major department.
The new advisor, while serving as a re-
source for the student, can best advise
that student about course selection and
career opportunities.

Advisors at Lycoming endeavor to
contribute to our students' development
in yet another way. We insist that stu-
dents assume full responsibility for their
decisions and academic progress. By
doing so, we help to prepare them for the
harder choices and responsibilities of the
professional world.

Also, Lycoming provides special
advising programs for careers in medi-
cine, law, and religion. Interested stu-
dents should register with the appropriate
advisory committee immediately after
deciding to enter one of these profes-
sions.

Preparation for Educational Profes-
sions — Lycoming College believes that
the liberal arts provide the best prepara-
tion for future teachers, thus all educa-
tion students complete a liberal arts ma-
jor in addition to the Lycoming College
Teacher Education Certificate require-
ments. Students can be certified in
elementary education or one or more of
the following secondary areas: art (K-
12), biology, chemistry, English, French,
general science (with biology or astron-
omy/physics tracks), German, mathe-
matics, music (K-12), physics, social

studies, and Spanish. All teacher-edu-
cation programs are approved by the
Pennsylvania Department of Education.
Pennsylvania certificates are recognized
in most other states either through
reciprocal agreements or by transcript
evaluation.

Preparation for Health Professions

— The program of pre-professional
education for the health professions
(allopathic, dental, osteopathic, podiat-
ric and veterinary medicine, optometry,
and pharmacy) is organized around a
sound foundation in biology, chemistry,
mathematics, and physics and a wide
range of subject matter from the humani-
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At
least three years of undergraduate study
is recommended before entry into a pro-
fessional school; the normal procedure is
to complete the bachelor of arts degree.
Students interested in one of the
health professions or in an allied health
career should make their intentions
known to the admissions office when
applying and to the Health Professions
Advisory Committee (HPAC) during
their first semester. This committee
advises students concerning prepara-
tion for and application to health-
professions schools. All pre-health
professions students are invited to join
the student Pre-Health Professions
Association. (See also descriptions
of the nursing program and of the
cooperative programs in podiatric
medicine, optometry, and medical
technology.)

Preparation for Legal Professions

— Lycoming offers a strong academic
preparation for students interested in law
as a profession. Admission to law school
is not predicated upon a particular major
or area of study; rather, a student is en-
couraged to design a course of study (tra-
ditional or interdisciplinary major)
which is of personal interest and signifi-
cance. While no specific major is recom-
mended, there are certain skills of par-
ticular relevance to the pre-law student:
clear writing, analytical thinking, and
reading comprehension. These skills
should be developed during the under-

graduate years.

Pre-law students should register with
the Legal Professions Advisory Commit-
tee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming and
should join the Pre-Law Society on cam-
pus. LPAC assists the pre-law student
through advisement, compilation of re-
commendations, and dissemination of
information and materials about law and
the legal profession. The Pre-Law Socie-
ty has sponsored films, speakers, and
field trips, including visits to law school
campuses.

Preparation for Theological Profes-
sions — The Theological Professions
Advisory Committee (TPAC) acts as a
"center" for students, faculty, and clergy
to discuss the needs of students who want
to prepare themselves for the ministry,
religious education, advanced training in
religion, or related vocations. Also, it
may help coordinate internships for stu-
dents who desire practical experience in
the parish ministry or related areas. Upon
entering Lycoming, students should reg-
ister with TPAC if they plan to investi-
gate the religious vocations.

In general, students preparing to
attend a theological seminary should ex-
amine the suggestions set down by the
Association of Theological Schools
(available from TPAC). Recommended
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a
major in one of the humanities (English,
history, languages, literature, philoso-
phy, religion) or one of the social scien-
ces (American studies, criminal justice,
economics, international studies, politic-
al science, psychology, sociology-
anthropology), and a variety of electives.
Students preparing for a career in reli-
gious education should major in religion
and elect five or six courses in psycholo-
gy, education, and sociology. This prog-
ram of study will qualify students to
work as an educational assistant or a
director of religious education after
graduate study in a theological seminary.

REGISTRATION

During the registration period, students
select their courses for the next semester
and register their course selections in the

Office of the Registrar. Course selection
is made in consultation with the student's
faculty advisor in order to insure that the
course schedule is consistent with Col-
lege requirements and student goals. Af-
ter the registration period, any change in
the student's course schedule must be
approved by both the faculty advisor and
Office of the Registrar. Students may not
receive credit for courses in which they
are not formally registered.

During the first five days of classes,
students may drop any course without
any record of such enrollment appear-
ing on the permanent record, and they
may add any course that is not closed.
Students wishing to drop a course
between the fifth day and the 12th
week of classes must secure a with-
drawal form from the Office of the
Registrar. Withdrawal grades are not
computed in the grade point average.
Students may not withdraw from courses
after the 12th week of a semester and the
comparable period during the May and
summer terms.

In two-credit (Vi unit) courses meeting
only during the last half of any semester,
students may drop/add for a period of
five days, effective with the mid-term
date shown on the academic calendar.
Withdrawal from half-semester courses
with a withdrawal grade may occur with-
in six weeks of the beginning of the
course. It is understood that the period of
time at the beginning of the semester and
at the mid-point of the semester will be
identical, for example, a period of five
days as indicated above.

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM

Instruction at Lycoming College is
organized, with few exceptions, on a
departmental basis, most courses are unit
courses, meaning that each course taken
is considered to be equivalent to four
semester hours of credit. Exceptions
occur in applied music and theatre
practicum courses, which are offered for
either one-half or one semester hour of
credit, and in departments that have
elected to offer certain courses for the
equivalent of one, two or three semester
hours of credit. Further, independent

studies and internships carrying two
semester hours of credit may be de-
signed. The normal student course load
is four courses during the fall and spring
semesters. Students who elect to attend
the special sessions may enroll in one
course during the May term and one or
two courses in the summer term. A
student is considered full time when
enrolled for a minimum of three courses
during the fall or spring semesters,
one course for the May term, and two
courses for the summer term. Students
may enroll in five courses during the
fall and spring semesters if they are
Lycoming scholars or were admitted to
the Dean's List at the end of the previous
semester. Exceptions may be granted by
the Dean of the College. Overloads are
not permitted during the May and
summer terms.

THE SYSTEM OF GRADING
AND REPORTING OF GRADES

The evaluation of student performance
in credit courses is indicated by the use
of traditional letter symbols. These sym-
bols and their definitions are as follows:
A Excellent — Signifies superior
achievement through mastery of content
or skills and demonstration of creative
and independent thinking.
B Good — Signifies better-than-
average achievement wherein the stu-
dent reveals insight and understanding.
C Satisfactory — Signifies satisfactory
achievement wherein the student's work
has been of average quality and quantity.
The student has demonstrated basic
competence in the subject area and may
enroll in additional course work.
D Passing — Signifies unsatisfactory
achievement wherein the student met
only the minimum requirements for
passing the course and should not
continue in the subject area without
departmental advice.
F Failing — Signifies that the student
has not met the minimum requirements
for passing the course.
I Incomplete work — Assigned in
accordance with the restrictions of
established academic policy.

R A repeated course — Students shall

have the option of repeating courses for

which they already have received a

passing grade in addition to those which

they have failed. Credit is received only

once for the course. The most recent

course grade will count toward the

G.P.A.

P Passing work, no grade assigned —

Converted from traditional grade of A

through D.

X Audit — Work as an auditor for

which no credit is earned.

W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal

from the course from the sixth day

through the twelfth week of the semester.

The cumulative grade point average
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying
quality points by credits and dividing
the total quality points by the total cred-
its. A quality point is the unit of mea-
surement of the quality of work done by
the student.

Grade

Quality Points

Earned

for each semester

hour

4.00

A-

3.67

B-^

3.33

3.00

B-

2.67

C +

2.33

2.00

1.67

D-^

1.33

1.00

D-

0.67

0.00

The grade point average for the major
is calculated in the same manner for the
courses required for the major.

A minimum of 2.00 is required for the
cumulative grade point average and for
the grade point average in the major to
meet the requirements for graduation.
The cumulative GPA is not determined
by averaging semester GPA's.

Use of the pass/fail grading option is
limited as follows (this does not apply to
English 049):

students may enroll on a P/F
basis in no more than one
course per semester and no more
than four courses during the
undergraduate career.

-P/F courses completed after
declaration of the major may not
be used to satisfy a requirement
of that major, including courses
required by the major depart-
ment which are offered by other
departments. (Instructor-desig-
nated courses are excepted from
this limitation.)

courses for which a grade of P is
recorded may not be used toward
fulfillment of any distribution
requirement.

students may not enroll in English
106 on a P/F basis,
a course selected on a P/F basis
which is subsequently withdrawn
will not count toward the four-
course limit.

■ instructor-designated courses may
be offered during the May term
with the approval of the Dean of
the College. Such courses are not
counted toward the four-course
limit.

P grades are not computed in the
grade point average,
students electing the P/F option
may designate a minimum accept-
ance letter grade from A to B-. If
the student earns the designated
grade or better, the grade will be
recorded in the permanent record
and computed in the grade point
average. If a passing grade lower
than the designated grade is
earned, a grade of P will be
recorded in the permanent record,
but will not be computed in the
grade point average. If a student
selects P/F (with no designated
minimum acceptance grade) and
earns a grade of A to D-, a P will
be recorded in the permanent
record but not computed in the
grade point average. In all cases,
if a student earns a grade of F
this grade will be recorded in the
permanent record and computed
in the student's grade point

average.

students must declare the P/F
option before the end of the
period during which courses may
be added during any given sem-
ester, half-semester, or term,
instructors are not notified which
of their students are enrolled on
an P/F basis.

students electing the P/F option
are expected to perform the same
work as those enrolled on a
regular basis.

Incomplete grades may be given
if, for absolutely unavoidable rea-
sons (usually medical in nature),
the student has not been able to
complete the work requisite to the
course. An incomplete grade must
be removed within six weeks of
the next regular semester.

Students shall have the option
of repeating courses for which
they already have received a pass-
ing grade in addition to those
which they have failed. Recording
of grades for all repeated courses
shall be governed by the following
conditions:

a course may be repeated only
one time.

both attempts will be recorded on
the student's transcript,
credit for the course will be given
only once.

the most recent grade will count
toward the G.P.A. with this excep-
tion: A "W" grade cannot replace
another grade.

a repeated course will be counted
toward the total number of unsuc-
cessful attempts.

ATTENDANCE

The academic program at Lycoming is
based upon the assumption that there is
value in class attendance for all students.
Individual instructors have the preroga-
tive of establishing reasonable absence
regulations in any course. The student is
responsible for learning and observing
these regulations.

STUDENT RECORDS

The policy regarding student educational
records is designed to protect the privacy
of students against unwarranted intru-
sions and is consistent with Section 438
of the General Education Provision Act
(commonly known as the Family Educa-
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as
amended). The details of the College
policy on student records and the proce-
dures for gaining access to student re-
cords are contained in the current issue
of Student Handbook, which is available
in the library and the Office of the Dean
of Student Services.

ACADEMIC STANDING AND
ACADEMIC HONESTY

Students will be placed on academic
probation if either the number of hours
completed or cumulative grade point
average falls below the following stan-
dards:

Semester

Hours

Cumulative

(Full-time)

Completed

GPA

1.70

1.80

1.90

2.00

1(M

2.00

120

2.00

In order to meet graduation require-
ments, students must complete 128 cre-
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part
time or for fewer than the normal four
courses per term will be expected to com-
plete an equivalent proportion of their
program each semester.

Students will be subject to suspension
from the College if they:

— are on probation for two consecu-
tive semesters;

— achieve a grade point average of
1.00 or below during any one semester.
Students will be subject to dismissal
from the College if they:

— cannot reasonably complete all re-
quirements for a degree;

— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc-
cessful course attempts (grades of F.
W. and R) except in the case of with-
drawal for medical or psychological
reasons.

The integrity of the academic process of
the College requires honesty in all phases
of the instructional program. The Col-
lege assumes that students are committed
to the principle of academic honesty.
Students who fail to honor this commit-
ment are subject to dismissal. Procedural
guidelines and rules for the adjudication
of cases of academic dishonesty are
printed in The Faculty' Handbook and
The Pathfiner (the student academic
handbook), copies of which are available
in the library.

TRANSFER CREDIT

College students who wish to study
at other campuses must obtain prior
written approval to do so from their
advisor and the Lycoming College
registrar. Coursework counting toward
a major or minor must be approved in
advance by the chairperson of the
department in which the major or minor
is offered. Once a course is approved, the
credit and grades for the course will
transfer to Lycoming and be calculated
in the student's grade point average as
if the courses were taken here. This
means that "D" and "F" grades will
transfer as well as all other grades. In
addition, students are expected to be
registered at Lycoming for their last eight
courses. Requests for waivers of this
regulation must be sent to the Committee
on Academic Standards. Final determi-
nation of transfer credit will be made by
the Lycoming College registrar based on
official transcripts only.

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION

Advanced Placement — Entering fresh-
men who have completed an advanced
course while in secondary school and
who have taken the appropriate adv-
anced-placement examination of the
College Entrance Examination Board

(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre-
dit and advanced placement at the time of
admission. A grade of three or above is
considered satisfactory. Students should
inform the Registrar's Office and their
academic advisor immediately when
advanced placement examinations have
been taken.

College Level Examination Prog-
ram (CLEP) — Students may earn col-
lege credit for superior achievement
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th
percentile or above on the General Ex-
aminations and the 65th percentile or
above on approved Subject Examina-
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent
of the course requirements for a bachelor
of arts degree. Although these examina-
tions may be taken after enrollment, new
students who are competent in a given
area are encouraged to take the examina-
tion of their choice during the second
semester of their senior year so that
Lycoming will have the test scores avail-
able for registration advisement for the
first semester of enrollment. Further in-
formation about CLEP may be obtained
through the secondary-school guidance
office or the Office of Admissions or the
Registrar at Lycoming College. Students
should inform the Registrar's Office and
their academic advisor immediately
when CLEP examinations have been
taken.

ACADEMIC HONORS

Deans's List — Students are admitted to
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and
spring semesters if they have completed
at least 15 credits with other than P or
R grades, and have a minimum grade
point average of 3.50 for the semester.

Graduation Honors — Students are
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the
bachelor of fine arts degree , or the bache-
lor of science in nursing degree with hon-
ors when they have earned the following
grade point averages based on all courses
attempted at Lycoming, with a minimum
of 64 credits (16 units) required for a
student to be eligible for honors:
summa cum laude 3.90-4.00

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89

cum laude 3.25-3.49

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes,
and Societies — Superior academic
achievement is recognized through the
conferring of awards and prizes at the
annual Honors Day convocation, the
Academic Awards banquet, and Com-
mencement and through election to
membership in honor societies.

Societies

Biology Beta Beta Beta

Freshmen Men Blue Key

Freshmen Women Gold Key

Economics .... Omicron Delta Epsilon

English Sigma Tau Delta

General Academic Phi Kappa Phi

History Phi Alpha Theta

Nursing Sigma Theta Tau

Philosophy Phi Sigma Tau

Physics Sigma Pi Sigma

Political Science Pi Sigma Alpha

Psychology Psi Chi

Social Science Pi Gamma Mu

Theatre .. Alpha Psi Omega (Omega Chi)

Prizes and Awards

American Chemical Society Award —
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan-
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given
to the outstanding senior in chemistry
who plans to enter the profession.

Accounting Society Service Award —
The award is given for outstanding ser-
vice to the Lycoming College Account-
ing Society.

American Institute of Chemists Prize —
The prize, given by the Philadelphia
section of the institute, goes to a senior
major for excellence in chemistry.

William T. and Ruth S. Askey Music
Prize — given to a graduating senior who
is recognized for his/her proficiency as a
music major.

Jack C. Buckle Award — The award is
given annually to a junior male student
with high moral qualities, who has made

an unusual contribution to campus life
through leadership in student activities.

Byron C. Brunstelter Science Award —
The award is given for outstanding
achievement in chemical and biological
sciences.

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement
Award — The award is given to that
freshman who has exhibited the highest
academic achievement in chemistry.

Chieftain Award — The College's most
prestigious award is given to the senior
who has contributed most to Lycoming
through support of school activities; who
has exhibited outstanding leadership
qualities; who has worked effectively
with other members of the College com-
munity; who has evidenced a good moral
code; and whose academic rank is above
the median for the preceding senior
class.

Civic Choir Award — The award is given
to the College choir member who has
outstanding musical ability and who has
made significant leadership contribu-
tions to the choir.

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given
to the senior who has been oustanding in
the promotion of College spirit through
participation in athletics and other activi-
ties.

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize
is given to the graduating student who
has done outstanding work in mathema-
tics.

Biology Service Award — student who
has shown good academic work and has
fostered the ideals of the department by
willingness to become involved in the
activities of the department.

Freshman Biology A ward — freshman
who has obtained the highest overall
average in Biology 110-111 (major
biology lecture and laboratory).

Durkheim Award — The award is given
to the senior sociology/anthropology ma-

jor who has done outstanding work in the
field.

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize —
The prize is given to the senior who has
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty,
school spirit, and participation in school
activities.

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art
Award — The award is given to the out-
standing senior art major in this field.

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art
Award — The award is given to the out-
standing senior art major in this field.

Excellence in Theatre Performance
Award — The award is given to the stu-
dent who has been outstanding as a per-
former in the Arena Theatre.

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award
— The award is given to the student who
has been outstanding as a technician for
the Arena Theatre.

Excellence in Political Science A ward —
The award goes to the senior political
science major who has performed with
excellence.

W. Arthur Faus Memorial Prize — Prize
given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur Faus,
a former Professor of Philosophy at
Lycoming College, to the graduating
senior who has done outstanding work in
philosophy.

J.W. Ferree Award — Given in memory
of the first mathematics professor at
Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickinson
Seminary, the award goes to the student
most active in mathematical sciences.

Faculty Prize — The prize is given to the
commuting student with satisfactory
scholarship and who has been outstand-
ing in promotion of school spirit through
participation in school activities.

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize —
The prize is given to the senior account-
ing major who has shown outstanding
achievement in accounting.

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The
prizes are given to the French, German,
and Spanish majors who have achieved
excellence in foreign languages.

John P. Graham Award — Named in
honor of a professor emeritus, the award
is given to the senior English major who
achieves the highest average in English.

Edward J. Gray Prizes — The prizes are
given to the graduating students with the
highest and second highest averages.

Dan Gustafson Award — In memory of a
former member of the English Depart-
ment, the award is given to the senior
English major whose analytical writing
demonstrates the highest standards of
literary and critical excellence.

IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote
membership in the society for juniors
who are very active on campus.

Junior Book Award — The award is
given to the outstanding junior political
science major.

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The prize is
given to the senior mathematics major
with outstanding achievement in the
field.

The Kramer and Hoffmann Associates
Award — for superior achievement in
Federal Income Tax.

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The
awards are given to the accounting, busi-
ness administration, and economics ma-
jors who show the greatest proficiency in
statistics; the mathematics major who
shows the greatest proficiency in applied
mathematics; the graduating senior who
shows the greatest proficiency in compu-
ter science and operations research; the
graduating senior business administra-
tion major with highest grade point aver-
age; the graduating senior with highest
average in the class and the graduating
nursing major with highest grade point
average.

Don Lincoln Larrabee Law Prize — The
prize is given to the graduating student
who has shown outstanding scholarship
in legal principles.

The John M. Lindemuth Endowed Prize
Fund — The John M. Lindemuth En-
dowed Prize Fund, established in 1986
by Mr. and Mrs. John M. Lindemuth of
Williamsport, Pennsylvania, provides
annual cash awards for varsity football
players who earn the highest cumulative
grade point average in their chosen field
of academic study at Lycoming College.
This prize is managed in compliance
with current NCAA regulations concern-
ing scholastic awards for athletes.

C. Daniel and Jeanne Little Award —
Presented in memory of two Lycoming
alumni, the award is given to the out-
standing student in public administra-
tion.

The Gertrude B. Madden Mass Com-
munication Award — Established in
1985 by the students of the Mass Com-
munication Society, the award is to be
presented annually to the senior mass
communication major who, in the judg-
ment of his or her peers, has best inte-
grated academic excellence, profession-
al development in a mass media field and
contribution to campus media.

The Makisu Award — The award is given
for outstanding service to the college
community, for dedication above and
beyond the realm of one's obligations to
the College.

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes —
The prizes are given to the senior majors
in mathematics, biology, chemistry,
physics, philosophy, and psychology
who have attained the highest averages.

Ethel McDonald Pax Christi Award —
The award is given for outstanding but
quiet consistency in the life of faith and
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy
personal integrity and humble loving
compassion expressed in daily life.

Walter G. Mclver Award — Named after
Lycoming's former choir director, the
award is given to the choir member who
has made outstanding campus contribu-
tions outside of choir.

Department of Nursing Award for Cli-
nical Excellence — outstanding achieve-
ment in the clinical setting.

Department of Nursing Faculty A ward

— senior nursing major who best exem-
plifies the spirit of the profession.

Lycoming College Nursing Honor Society
Research Recognition Award — given
to the nursing student who has demon-
strated an in-depth understanding of
the research process, as evidenced by a
completed research project, with formal
dissemination of the results of the study.

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub-
lic Accountants Award — The award is
given to the senior accounting major who
has demonstrated high scholastic stand-
ing and qualities of leadership.

Pocahontas Award — The award is
given to Lycoming's outstanding female
athlete.

Psi Chi Service Award — The award is
given for contributions to the Psychology
Department.

Research and Writing Prize in History —
The prize is given to the student who
does the best work in History 449.

The Professor Logan A. Richmond
Accounting Prize — is awarded annually
to a graduating senior who has done out-
standing work in accounting and demon-
strated exceptional proficiency in
writing.

The Janet A. Rodgers Academic Award

— established in honor of the founding
chair of the Department of Nursing, pro-
vides an annual $100 award to senior
nursing student who demonstrates ex-
ceptional academic achievement and has
been an active participant in health-
related programs.

Mary L. Russell Award — Named in
honor of a professor emeritus of music,
the award is given for outstanding music-
al achievement.

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the
student with the highest achievement in
calculus, foundations of mathematics,
algebra, and analysis.

Nathan A . Scheib Memorial Music Fund
— In memory of a friend of the College,
the fund provides financial assistance to
qualified deserving students for adv-
anced training in music.

Senior Management A ward — The
award is given to the senior business ma-
jor with the best senior project in Busi-
ness Policies 441.

Senior Scholarship Prize in History —
The prize is given to the senior major
with the highest average.

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon-
sored by the Office of Student Services,
the award is given to students who have
made outstanding contributions to
Lycoming.

Frances K. Skeath Award — The award
is given to' the senior with outstanding
achievement in mathematics.

J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is
given for superior undergraduate
achievement and potential for further
work in psychology.

Sophomore Intermediate Accounting
Award — for the accounting major
with the highest average in Intermediate
Accounting at the end of the spring term.

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in
Economics — The award is given to the
graduating student with outstanding
achievement in economics.

John A. Streeter Memorial Award in
Music — The award is given to the
College band member who has out-
standing musical ability and who has

made significant leadership contri-
butions to the band.

Tomahawk Award — The award is given
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete.

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is
given to the senior chemistry major who
has done outstanding work in the field.

Wall Street Journal Awards — Two
awards are given. One is given to the
senior business major for excellence in
the field and service to the College com-
munity. A second award is given for ex-
cellence in economics.

Williamsport Rotary Club Nursing Prize
— established in 1988, this endowed
prize provides annual interest to a regis-
tered nurse with the highest cumulative
grade point average. Candidates should
have successfully completed a minimum
of 24 academic credits toward the BSN
degree.

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award
is given to the junior athlete who has
shown the most improvement.

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The
scholarship is given to the junior woman
student who has shown satisfactory scho-
larship, outstanding school spirit, and
who is active in campus activities.

Departmental Honors — Honors pro-
jects are normally undertaken only in a
student's major, and are available only to
exceptionally well-qualified students
who have a solid background in the area
of the project and are capable of con-
siderable self-direction. The prere-
quisites for registration in an honors
program are as follows:

— a faculty member from the depart-
ment(s) in which the honors project is to
be undertaken must agree to be the direc-
tor and must secure departmental
approval of the project.

— the director, in consultation with
the student, must convene a committee
consisting of two faculty members from
the department in which the project is to
be undertaken, one of whom is the direc-

tor of the project, and one faculty mem-
ber from each of two other departments
related to the subject matter of the study.

— the honors committee must then
certify by their signatures on the applica-
tion that the project in question is
academically legitimate and worthy of
pursuit as an honors project, and that the
student in question is qualified to pursue
the project.

— the project must be approved by the
Committee on Individual Studies.

Students successfully complete hon-
ors projects by satisfying the following
conditions in accordance with guide-
lines established by the Committee on
Individual Studies:

— the student must produce a sub-
stantial research paper, critical study, or
creative project. If the end product is a
creative project, a critical paper analyz-
ing the techniques and principles em-
ployed and the nature of the achievement
represented in the project shall be sub-
mitted.

— the student must successfully ex-
plain and defend the work in a final oral
examination given by the honors com-
mittee.

— the honors committee must certify
that the student has successfully de-
fended the project, and that the student's
achievement is clearly superior to that
which would ordinarily be required to
earn a grade of "A" in a regular indepen-
dent-studies course.

— the Committee on Individual Stu-
dies must certify that the student has
satisfied all of the conditions mentioned
above.

Except in unusual circumstances, honors
projects are expected to involve indepen-
dent study in two consecutive unit
courses. Successful completion of the
honors project will cause the designation
of honors in that department to be placed
upon the permanent record. Acceptable
theses are deposited in the College lib-
rary. In the event that the study is not
completed successfully or is not deemed
worthy of honors, the student shall be
re-registered in independent studies and
given a final grade for the course.

Auditors — Any person may audit
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui-
tion per course. Laboratory and other
special fees must be paid in full. Ex-
aminations, papers, and other evaluation
devices are not required of auditors, but
individual arrangements may be made to
complete such exercises with the consent
of the instructor. The option to audit a
course must be declared during the same
period (currently five days) at the begin-
ning of each semester, half-semester, or
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must
be completed in the Registrar's Office.

SPECIAL FEATURES

Academic Resource Center — The

Academic Resource Center, located on
the first floor of Rich Hall, provides a
variety of free services to the campus
community.

— Writing Center: Working one-on-
one, Writing Tutors use questioning
techniques to help others improve
individual papers while developing
confidence and independence as
writers. This service is offered on
a walk-in basis. Other services
offered through the Writing Center
include the Paper File, a file of
graded essays maintained by course;
the Writing Room, a quiet place
for writers to work; self-paced,
computer assisted typing instruc-
tion; and the Documentation Style
Manual for use when citing sources
on research projects.

— Tutoring Center: The ARC provides
one-on-one peer tutoring in math,
foreign languages, and sciences on
a walk-in basis and peer tutoring
by arrangement in other subjects.
Tutors assist students with home-
work assignments and exam review.

— Survival Skills Program: The ARC
and volunteer faculty conduct a
group of study skills workshops on
time management, note-taking
from lectures, reading textbooks,
successful study techniques, and
WordPerfect.

Developmental Program — The develop-
mental program is provided for students

who are identified as being able to
benefit from specialized classroom
instruction in college-level reading and
writing skills. Students develop these
skills both through a course designed
specifically to meet their needs and in the
context of the regular academic cur-
riculum. Reading and writing skills are
taught in a one-unit developmental
course (English 049) that is coordinated
with selected courses in one of the follow-
ing areas: economics, history, political
science, psychology, or sociology. Math
skills are taught in a one-half unit
algebra course (Mathematics 005) which
is conducted on an individualized basis
with tutorial support.

Placement tests in English and mathe-
matics are administered as a part of the
orientation program. Scores on these
tests determine whether placement in
Education 049 and/or Mathematics 005
is advisable. A placement test may be
scheduled three times maximum, one of
which may be scheduled after matricu-
lation. A retest fee of $25.00 will be
charged for test administration scheduled
during a fall or spring semester.

Independent Studies — Independent
studies are available to any qualified stu-
dent who wishes to engage in and receive
academic credit for any academically
legitimate course of study for which he or
she could not otherwise receive credit. It
may be pursued at any level (introduc-
tory, intermediate, or advanced) and in
any department, whether or not the stu-
dent is a major in that department. Stu-
dies projects which duplicate catalog
courses are sometimes possible, and are
subject to the same provisions which
apply to all studies projects. In order for a
student to be registered in an indepen-
dent-study course, the following condi-
tions must be satisfied;

— an appropriate member of the
faculty must agree to supervise the pro-
ject and must certify by signing the ap-
plication form that the project is
academically legitimate and involve? an
amount of work appropriate for the
amount of academic credit requested,
and that the student in question is qual-
ified to pursue the project.

— the studies project must be
approved by the chairman of the depart-
ment in which the studies project is to be
undertaken.

— after the project is approved by the
instructor and by the chairman of the
appropriate department, the studies pro-
ject must be approved by the Committee
on Individual Studies.

In addition, participation in indepen-
dent-studies projects, with the exception
of those which duplicate catalog courses,
is subject to the following:

— students may not engage in more
than one independent-studies project
during any given semester.

— students may not engage in more
than two independent-studies projects
during their academic careers at Lycom-
ing College.

As with other academic policies, any
exceptions to these two rules must
be approved by the Committee on
Academic Standards.

Internship Program — An in-
ternship is a course jointly sponsored by
the College and a public or private agen-
cy or subdivision of the Collge in which a
student is enabled to earn college credit
by participating in some active capacity
as an assistant, aide, or apprentice. At
least one-half of the effort expended by
the intern should consist of academic
work related to agency situations. The
objectives of the internship program are

( 1 ) to further the development of a cen-
tral core of values, awarenesses,
strategies, skills, and information
through experiences outside the clas-
sroom or other campus situations, and

(2) to facilitate the integration of theory
and practice by encouraging students to
relate their on-campus academic experi-
ences more directly to society in general
and to possible career and other post-
baccalaureate objectives in particular.

Any junior or senior student in good
academic standing may petition the
Committee on Individual Studies for
approval to serve as an intern. A max-
imum of 16 credits can be earned through
the internship program. Guidelines for

program development, assignment of
tasks and academic requirements, such
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc.,
are established in consultation with a
faculty director at Lycoming and an
agency supervisor at the place of in-
ternship.

Students with diverse majors have par-
ticipated in a wide variety of internships,
including those with the Allenwood
Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming County
Commissioners Office, Department of
Environmental Resources, Head Start,
Lycoming County Historical Society,
business and accounting firms, law
offices, hospitals, social service agen-
cies, banks, and Congressional offices.

May Term — The May term is a four-
week voluntary session designed to pro-
vide students with courses listed in the
catalog and experimental and special
courses that are not normally available
during the fall and spring semesters and
summer term. Some courses are offered
on campus; others involve travel. A
number offer interdisciplinary credit.
Illustrations of the types of courses
offered during the May term are:

(a) Study-Travel; Cultural tours of
Germany. Spain, and France; Archaelo-
gical expeditions to the Middle East;
Anthropological expeditions to study tri-
cultural communities in New Mexico;
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt.

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field
Ornithology, Energy Economics, Wri-
ter's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro-
cesses, Collective Bargaining, Aquatic
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy
Alternatives, White Collar Crime, Las-
ers and their Applications, Selected
Short Story Writers and their Works,
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction,
Administrative and Organizational Be-
havior of Police, Plant and Greenhouse
Management, and Street Law.

Although participation in the May
term is voluntary, student response has
been outstanding with approximately 20
percent of the student body enrolling. In
addition to the courses themselves.

attractions include small and informal
classes and reduced tuition rates.

Part Time Students — Students who
do not wish to pursue a degree at Lycom-
ing College may, if space permits, regis-
ter for credit or audit courses on either a
part-time or full-time basis. Students
who register for one or two courses are
considered to be enrolled part time; stu-
dents who register for three or four
courses are considered to be enrolled full
time.

Anyone wishing to register as a non-
degree student must fill out an applica-
tion form in the Admissions Office, pay
a one-time application fee and pay the
tuition rate in effect at the time of each
enrollment. After a non-degree student
has attempted four courses, the Dean of
the College reserves the right to grant or
deny permission to continue to register
in this category.

All non-degree students are subject to
the general laws and regulations of the
College as stated in the College Catalog
and the Student Handbook. The College
reserves the right to deny permission to
register to individuals who do not meet
the standards of the College.

Students who wish to change from a
non-degree to a degree status must reapp-
ly (with no application fee) and satisfy all
conditions for admission and registration
in effect at the time of application for
degree status.

Study Abroad — Students have the
opportunity to study abroad under au-
spices of approved universities and agen-
cies. While study abroad is particularly
attractive to students majoring in foreign
languages and literatures, this oppor-
tunity is open to all students in good
academic standing. Mastery of a foreign
language is desirable but not required in
all programs. Dr. Barbara F. Buedel,
assistant professor of Spanish, serves as
coordinator for the Study Abroad Pro-
gram. Interested students may contact
her about opportunities available and
procedural questions.

Teacher Intern Program — The pur-
pose of the teacher intern program is to

provide individuals who have completed
a baccalaureate degree with the oppor-
tunity to become certified teachers
through on-the-job training. Interns can
earn a Lycoming College Teacher
Education Certificate and be certified by
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania in
elementary education or one or more of
the following secondary areas: art, biolo-
gy, chemistry, English, French, general
science (with biology or astronomy/phy-
sics tracks), German, mathematics,
music, physics, social studies, and
Spanish.

Interested individuals should file a for-
mal application with the Education De-
partment for admission to the Intern
Program. Upon completion of the ap-
plication process, interns receive a letter
of Intern Candidacy from the Pennsylva-
nia Department of Education which the
candidate then uses to apply for a
teaching position. Necessary profession-
al coursework can be completed prior to
the teaching experience or coordinated
with the teaching experience when indi-
viduals obtain teaching positions.

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re-
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of
any student engaged in or en route to or from
any off-campus study or activity not under the
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution.

COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS

Lycoming has developed several
cooperative programs to provide stu-
dents with opportunities to extend their
knowledge, abilities, and talents in
selected areas through access to the spe-
cialized academic programs and facili-
ties of other colleges, universities,
academies, and hospitals. Although
thorough advisement and curricular
planning are provided for each of the
cooperative programs, admission to
Lycoming and registration in the prog-
ram of choice do not guarantee admis-
sion to the cooperating institution. The
prerogative of admitting students to the
cooperative aspect of the program rests
with the cooperating institution. Stu-
dents who are interested in a cooperative
program should contact the coordinator

during the first week of the first semester
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is
necessary to plan their course programs
in a manner that will insure completion
of required courses according to the
schedule stipulated for the program. All
cooperative programs require special
coordination of course scheduling at
Lycoming.

Engineering — Combining the
advantages of a liberal-arts education
and the technical training of an engineer-
ing curriculum, this program is offered in
conjunction with The Pennsylvania State
University. Students complete three
years of study at Lycoming and two years
at the cooperating university. Upon satis-
factory completion of the first year of
engineering studies, Lycoming awards
the bachelor of arts degree. When stu-
dents successfully complete the second
year of engineering studies, the cooper-
ating university awards the bachelor of
science degree in engineering.

At Lycoming, students complete the
distribution program and courses in
physics, mathematics, and chemistry.
The Pennsylvania State University of-
fers aerospace, agricultural^ ceramic,
chemical, civil, electrical, engineering
science, environmental, industrial,
mechanical, mining and nuclear
engineering.

Forestry or Environmental Studies

— Lycoming College offers a coopera-
tive program with Duke University in
environmental management and fore-
stry. Qualified students can earn the
bachelor's and master's degrees in five
years, spending three years at Lycoming
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming
distribution and major requirements
must be completed by the end of the
junior year. At the end of the first year at
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro-
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or
Master of Environmental Management
to qualified candidates at the end of the
second year.

The major program emphases at Duke
are Forest Resource Management, Re-
source Economics and Policy, and Re-

source Ecology. The program is flexible
enough, however, to accommodate a
variety of individual designs. An under-
graduate major in one of the natural sci-
ences, social sciences, or business may
provide good preparation for the prog-
rams at Duke, but a student with any
undergraduate concentration will be con-
sidered for admission. All students need
at least two courses each in biology,
mathematics, and economics.

Students begin the program at Duke in
July after their junior year at Lycoming
with a one-month session of field work in
natural resource management. They
must complete a total of 48 units which
generally take four semesters.

Some students prefer to complete the
bachelor's degree before undertaking
graduate study at Duke. The master's
degree requirements for these students
are the same as for those students enter-
ing after the junior year, but the 48-unit
requirement may be reduced for com-
pleted relevant undergraduate work of
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions
are determined individually and consider
the student's educational background
and objectives.

Medical Technology — Students de-
siring a career in medical technology
may either complete a bachelor of arts
program followed by a clinical internship
at any American Medical Association-
accredited hospital, or they may com-
plete the cooperative program. Students
electing the cooperative program nor-
mally study for three years at Lycoming,
during which time they complete 24 unit
courses, including the College distribu-
tion requirements, a major, and require-
ments of the National Accrediting Agen-
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences
(NAACLS). The current requirements of
the NAACLS are: four courses in che-
mistry (one of which must be either orga-
nic or bio-chemistry); four courses in
biology (including courses in microbiol-
ogy and immunology), and one course in
mathemtics.

Students in the cooperative program
usually major in biology, following a
modified major of six unit courses that
exempts them from Ecology (Biology

224) and Plant Sciences (Biology 225).
Students must take either Microbiology
(Biology 221) or Microbiology for the
Health Sciences (Biology 226), and
either Animal Physiology (Biology 223)
or Cell Physiology (Biology 335). The
cooperative program requires successful
completion of a one-year internship at an
American Medical Association-
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affili-
ated with the following accredited hos-
pitals: Divine Providence, Rolling Hill,
Robert Packer, Lancaster, and Abing-
ton. Students in the cooperative program
receive credit at Lycoming for each of
eight unit courses in biology and chemis-
try successfullly completed during the
clinical internship. Successful comple-
tion of the Registry Examination is not
considered a graduation requirement at
Lycoming College.

Students entering a clinical internship
for one year after graduation from
Lycoming must complete all of the re-
quirements of the cooperative program,
but are not eligible for the biology major
exemptions indicated above. Upon gra-
duation, such students may apply for
admission to a clinical program at any
hospital.

Optometry — Through the Acceler-
ated Optometry Education Curriculum
Program, students interested in a career
in optometry may qualify for admission
to the Pennsylvania College of
Optometry after only three years at
Lycoming College. After four years at
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry a
student will earn a Doctor of Optometry
degree. Selection of candidates for the
professional segment of the program is
completed by the admissions committee
of the Pennsylvania College of
Optometry during the student's third
year at Lycoming. (This is one of two
routes that students may choose. Any
student, of course, may follow the regu-
lar application procedures for admission
to the Pennsylvania College of
Optometry or another college of
optometry to matriculate following com-
pletion of his or her baccalaureate prog-
ram.) During the three years at Lycom-
ing College, the student will complete 24

unit courses, including all distribution
requirements, and will prepare for his or
her professional training by obtaining a
solid foundation in biology, chemistry,
physics, and mathematics. During the
first year of study at the Pennsylvania
College of Optometry, the student will
take 39 semester hours of basic science
courses in addition to introductions to
optometry and health care. Successful
completion of the first year of profes-
sional training will complete the course
requirements for the A.B. degree at
Lycoming College.

Most students will find it convenient
to major in biology in order to satisfy the
requirements of Lycoming College and
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry.
Such students are allowed to complete a
modified biology major which will ex-
empt them from two biology courses:
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Scien-
ces (Biology 225). (This modified major
requires the successful completion of the
initial year at the Pennsylvania College
of Optometry.) Students desiring other
majors must coordinate their plans with
the Health Professions Advisory Com-
mittee in order to insure that they have
satisfied all requirements.

The Philadelphia Urban Semester —

A full semester liberal arts program for
professional development and field study
is now available to Lycoming students.
The program components are: field
placement; City Seminar; evening semi-
nars; and living and learning in the city.
The program is open to students major-
ing in any discipline or program. The
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon-
sored and administered by the Great
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion,
Antioch, Denison, De Pauw, Earlham,
Hope, Kalamazoo, Kenyon, Oberlin,
Ohio Wesleyan, Wabash, Wooster).

Normally the above special-semester
programs are open only to juniors.

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume re-
sponsibility for the health, safety, or welfare of
students engaged in or en route to or from any
off-campus studies or activities which are not
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu-
tion.

Podiatry — Students interested in
podiatry may eitiier seek admission to a
college of podiatric medicine upon com-
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or
through the Accelerated Podiatric
Medical Education-Curriculum Program
(APMEC). The latter program provides
an opportunity for students to qualify for
admission to the Pennsylvania College of
Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM)
after three years of study at Lycoming.
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC
program must successfully complete 24
unit courses, including the distribution
requirements and a basic foundation
in biology, chemistry, physics, and
mathematics. During the first year of
study at PCPM or OCPM, students
must successfully complete a program of
basic science courses and an introduction
to podiatry. Successful completion of the
first year of professional training will
contribute toward the fulfillment of the
course requirements for the bachelor of
arts degree at Lycoming.

Most students in the cooperative prog-
ram will major in biology; if so, they will
be allowed to complete a modified major
which will exempt them from two biolo-
gy courses: Ecology (Biology 224) and
Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This
modified major requires the successful
completion of the initial year at PCPM or
OCPM).

Students interested in a career in
podiatric medicine should indicate their
intentions to the Health Professions
Advisory Committee.

U.S. Army Reserve Officers Train-
ing Corps Program (R.O.T.C.) — The

program provides an opportunity for
Lycoming students to enroll in R.O.T.C.
Lycoming notes enrollment in and suc-
cessful completion of the program on
student transcripts. Military Science is a
four-year program divided into a basic
course given during the freshman and
sophomore years and an advanced course
given during the junior and senior years.
Students who have not completed the
basic course may qualify for the adv-
anced course by completing summer
camp between the sophomore and junior

years. Students enrolled in the advanced
course receive an annual stipend of
$1 ,000. One course each in written com-
munication, human behavior and milit-
ary history will fulfill the professional
military education requirements.
R.O.T.C. scholarship cadets must also
complete one semester of a foreign lan-
guage.

Students successfully completing the
advanced course and advanced summer
camp between the junior and senior years
will qualify for a commission as a Sec-
ond Lieutenant in the United States Army
upon graduation, and will incur a service
obligation in the active Army or Army
Reserves. The only expense to the stu-
dent for this program is the $75 uniform
deposit, which is refundable, less costs.

Sculpture — The Art Department
with the Johnson Atelier Technical Insti-
tute of Sculpture in Mercerville, New
Jersey, offers a BFA degree in sculpture.
It uses a classical apprenticeship
approach as its teaching method. This
ancient method of teaching is combined
at Johnson with the most modem and
technically advanced foundry and fabri-
cating techniques.

The Art Department offers a synthesis
program that interrelates the student ex-
perience at both institutions. This is
achieved by having the student rotate be-
tween Lycoming and the atelier so that
each form of education is preparation for
the other. Lycoming offers a core
academic program, a course of study in
the Art Department, and elective course
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight
course units of college credit to the stu-
dent for having successfully completed
one of the apprenticeship programs at the
Johnson Atelier.

All work completed by the student at
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore
year will be applicable to a bachelor of
arts degree with a major in art should the
student decide to withdraw from the BFA
program. If the student should withdraw
from the cooperative program prior to
completing the apprenticeship at the
Johnson Atelier, Lycoming will give up
to four units of credit or one semester's
work for the internship. If, however, the

student completes more work at the ate-
lier than the four units, that extra work
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts
degree; it will only be used as part of the
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then
only if the course at the atelier is com-
pleted.

This course of study is very rigorous.
It will require that the student be in-
volved almost continuously, either at
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, dur-
ing the four years it will take to complete
the degree. (See Art Department listing
for specific program.)

Cross Registration — A special oppor-
tunity exists in the Williamsport area
for students to take courses through a
registration arrangement with Pennsyl-
vania College of Technology. Students
may enroll for less than a full-time course
load at Penn College while remain-
ing enrolled in courses at Lycoming.

Student Teaching Abroad — Lycom-
ing College has estabished a cooperation
program with Moorhead State University
whereby teacher education students may
do all or part of their student teaching in a
foreign country.

This program offers exceptional stu-
dents the opportunity to student teach in
nearly any country in the world. Students
are placed in independent international
schools where English is the instruction-
al language. An effort is made to assign
students in geographical areas that will
enrich their backgrounds, serve their
special interests and expand their cultural
horizons.

Washington, United Nations and
London Semester and Capitol Semes-
ter Internship Program — With the
consent of the Department of Political
Science, selected students are permitted
to study in Washington, D.C., at The
American University for one semester.
They may choose from seven different
programs: Washington Semester, Urban
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, In-
ternational Development Semester, Eco-
nomic Policy Semester, Science and
Technology Semester, American Studies
Semester.

With the consent of either the Depart-
ment of History or Political Science,
selected students may enroll at Drew
University in Madison, New Jersey, in
the United Nations Semester, which is
designed to provide a first-hand ac-
quaintance with the world organization.
Students with special interests in world
history, international relations, law, and
politics are eligible to participate.

The London Semester programs of
Drew and The American Universities
emphasize European history, politics,
and culture. Interested students partici-
pate with the consent of either the De-
partments of History or Political Sci-
ence.

The Capitol Semester Internship Prog-
ram is available to eligible students on a
competitive basis. The program is co-
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of
Administration and Department of
Education. Paid Internships are available
to students in most majors. Interested
students should contact the Career De-
velopment Center for additional in-
formation.

THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM

The Lycoming College Scholar Prog-
ram is a special program designed to
meet the needs and aspirations of highly
motivated students of superior intellec-
tual ability. The Lycoming Scholar satis-
fies the general distribution require-
ments, but on a more exacting level and
with more challenging courses than the
average student. Lycoming Scholars also
participate in special courses and semi-
nars and in serious independent study
culminating in a senior project super-
vised by their major department.

Students are admitted to the program
by invitation of the Scholar Council, the
group which oversees the program. The
council consists of a Director and four
other faculty selected by the Dean of the
College, and four students elected by
current scholars. The guidelines gov-
erning selection of new scholars are
flexible: academic excellence, intellec-
tual curiosity, and creativity are all taken
into account. Students who desire to par-
ticipate in the Scholar Program but are

not invited may petition the Scholar
Council for consideration.

To graduate as a Scholar, a student
must have at least a 3.0 cumulative
average. Scholars must take the First
Year Scholar Seminar during their first
year in the program and the Senior
Scholar Seminar during their last year in
residence at Lycoming. In addition, the
following distribution requirements must
be met. (Slightly modified requirements
exist for students in the cooperative
programs; a list of these requirements
can be obtained from the Scholar
Council.)

Scholar Distribution Requirements
for Students in AB
and BFA Programs.

A. English. Scholars must complete
English 106 and one literature course
numbered 200 or higher. The Scholar
Council strongly recommends that
qualified scholars enroll in the honors
section of English 106 if scheduling
permits. English 106 must be taken
during the freshman year.

B. Foreign Language/Mathematical
Sciences. Scholars must satisfy the re-
quirement in either language or mathe-
matical sciences. Language: Scholars
must complete two courses numbered
1 1 1 or higher (excluding courses taught
in English). Mathematical Sciences: The
mathematical placement test determines
whether a Scholar must take two or three
courses for distribution. At least one
course must be selected from Mathema-
tics 116, 128, 130, or 214. Only one
computer science course may be used to
fulfill the mathematical sciences require-
ment.

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars
must satisfy this requirement in either of
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses
numbered 221 or higher. Religion: Two
courses numbered 222 or higher.

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the
requirement in one of four areas. Art:
Two options are available in art. Either
two courses from Art 222, 223, 331,
332, 333, 334, 335 (Art History), or two
courses from Art 1 1 1 , 1 15, 220, and 225
(Studio Art). Music: The equivalent of

two units of credit from Music 117,
160-169, 330 or higher. Theatre: Two
courses from Theatre 140 or higher, ex-
cluding Theatre 148. Literature: Two
literature courses from English 220 or
higher. Foreign Languages and Litera-
tures 225, or French, German, or Span-
ish 323 or higher.

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must
satisfy the requirements in one of three
areas. Astronomy/Physics: Two courses
numbered 1 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two
courses numbered 1 10 or higher. Che-
mistrv: Two courses numbered 1 10 or
higher.

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars
must satisfy the requirements in one of
five areas. Economics: Two courses
numbered 1 10 or higher. History: Two
courses, one of which must be numbered
200 or higher. Political Science: Two
courses numbered 116 or higher.
Psychology: Two courses including
Psychology 110 and one course num-
bered 224 or higher (excluding Psychol-
ogy 338). Sociology/ Anthropology: Two
courses from Sociology 110, 220, 224,
226, 227, 229, 300 or higher.

Scholar Distribution Requirements
for Students in BSN Program

A. English. Same as for BA and BFA
degrees.

B. Mathematical Science. Same as for
BA and BFA degrees. (Note that the
nursing major requires Mathematics 103
and one from Computer Science 108
125, or Mathematics 214).

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak-
ing Philosophy 219 and Religion 120.

D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for
BA and BFA scholars.

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology
113, Biology 1 14, Biology 226 (required
for the major).

F. History/Social Science. Met by
Psychology 110, Psychology 117, (re-
quired for the major) and one course in
Sociology 300 or higher. (This sociology
course may be taken in lieu of the intro-
ductory guided elective in Sociology for
the BSN.)

All Scholar Students must complete
the following:

G. Physical Education. Scholars must
satisfy the same physical education re-
quirements stipulated by the College for
all students.

H. Designated Courses. In addition to
completing the distribution require-
ments, Scholars will be required to
complete two upper-level courses chosen
from a list of "designated" courses
selected and maintained by the Scholar
Council. "Designated" courses must be
outside of a scholar's major unless
the scholar has more than one major.
Normally, Scholars will not begin taking
designated courses until their sophomore
year.

I. Senior Project. In the senior year,
scholars must successfully complete an
independent studies or departmental
honors project which has been approved
in advance by the Independent Studies
Committee and the Scholar Council.
This project must be presented orally as
part of the Senior Scholar Seminar and be
accepted by the Scholar Council.

J. Scholars must complete a major and
32 units, exclusive of the First Year and
Senior Scholar Seminars.

K. In the case of transfer students and
those who seek to enter the program after
their freshman year and in other cases
deemed by the Scholar Council to in-
volve special or extraordinary circumst-
ances, the Council shall make adjust-
ments to the scholar distribution require-
ments provided that in all cases such ex-
ceptions and adjustments would still
satisfy the regular College distribution
requirements.

Accounting

Numbers 001-049 Developmental

courses

Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses

and Freshman level courses

Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses

and Sophomore level courses

Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses

and Junior level courses

Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and

Senior level courses

Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue

courses offered on a limited basis

Numbers 160-169 Applied Music

Theatre Practicums and other fractional

credit courses

Numbers 470-479 Internships

Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study

Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for

Departmental Honors
*N = course level 1 , 2, 3, or 4 as deter-
mined by department
Courses not in sequence are listed separ-
ately, as:

Drawing Art 1 1 1

Color Theory Art 212

Courses which imply a sequence are in-
dicated with a dash between, meaning
that the first semester must be taken prior
to the second, as:

Intermediate French

French 111-112

All students have the right of access to all
courses.

ACCOUNTING

Associate Professor: Kuhns
Assistant Professor: Wienecke

(Chairperson)
Part-time Instructors: Uzupis, Weiss

The purpose of the accounting major is
to help prepare the student for a career
within the accounting profession. The
major has two tracks. Track I is designed
for students whose primary interests lie
in the financial area or public accounting
and provides preparation for the Certi-
fied Public Accountant Examination;
Track II is designed for students with an
interest in management accounting and
provides preparation for the Certified
Management Accountant Examination.

Track I — Financial Accounting re-
quires: Accounting 110, 220-221, 330,

440, 441, 443, 445, Mathematics 103,
Computer Science 108, and one unit
to be selected from Philosophy 216,
Accounting 225, 226, 331 , 442, 446, 447,
and 448 or Internship. Business 110
may be substituted for Accounting 110.
Duplicate credit will not be granted.

Students seeking entry into the public
accounting field are advised to investi-
gate the professional requirements for
certification in the state in which they
intend to practice so that they may meet
all educational requirements prior to gra-
duation. All Track I majors are advised
to enroll in Accounting 225, 226, 331
442, 447 and 448, Economics 110 and
111, Business 335, 336, and 338, and
one of the following: Business 340,
Economics 220, or 337.
Track II — Management Accounting re-
quires: Accounting 110, 220, 330-331,
444, and 470 or 480; Mathematics 103;
Computer Science 108; and Business
338, 339, and 440. All Track II majors
are advised to enroll in Economics 1 10
and 1 1 1 and Business 335 and 336. Stu-
dents planning to sit for the Certified
Management Accountant Examination
are advised to enroll in Accounting 440,

441, 442, and 443. Business 110 may
be substituted for Accounting 110.
Duplicate credit wilt not be granted.

Three minors are offered by the De-
partment of Accounting. The following
courses are required to complete a minor
in Financial Accounting: Accounting
110, 220, 221, 443, 447 and any other
accounting course or independent study.
A minor in Managerial Accounting re-
quires the completion of Accounting
1 10, 220, 330-331 and 444. To obtain a
minor in Federal Income Tax, a student
must complete Accounting 110, 220-
221, 441, and 442.

110 ELEMENTARY

ACCOUNTING THEORY
An introductory course in recording, clas-
sifying, summarizing, and interpreting the
basic business transaction. Problems of clas-
sification and interpretation of accounts and
preparation of financial statements are stu-
died. Not open to students who have re-

ceived credit for Business 110. Prere-
quisite: Second-semester freshman or con-
sent of instructor.

220-221

INTERMEDIATE
ACCOUNTING THEORY

An intensive study of accounting statements
and analytical procedures with an emphasis
upon corporate accounts, various decision
models, price-level models, earnings per
share, pension accounting, accounting for
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre-
requisite: Accounting 110.

225 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS
Deals with the analysis of financial state-
ments as an aid to decision making. The
theme of the course is understanding the
financial data which are analyzed as well as
the methods by which they are analyzed and
interpreted This course should prove of
value to all who need a thorough understand-
ing of the uses to which financial statements
are put as well as to those who must know
how to use them intelligently and effectively.
This includes accountants, security analysts,
lending officers, credit analysts, managers,
and all others who make decisions on the
basis of financial data. Prerequisite:
Accounting 1 10 or Business 110.

226 GOVERNMENT AND
FUND ACCOUNTING

This course is designed to mtroduce account-
ing for not-for-profit organizations. Muni-
cipal accounting and reporting are studied.
Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or Business
110. One-half unit of credit.

330-331

COST AND BUDGETARY
ACCOUNTING THEORY

Methods of accounting for material, labor,
and factory overhead expenses consumed in
manufacturing using job order, process, and
standard costing. Application of cost
accounting and budgetary theory to decision
making in the area of make or buy. expansion
of production and sales, and accounting for
control are dealt with. Prerequisites:
Accounting 220 and Mathematics 103 or
consent of instructor.

440 AUDITING THEORY

A study of the science or an of verifying,
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and re-
ports. The goal of the course is to emphasize
concepts which will enable students to
understand the philosophy and environment
of auditing. Special attention is given to the
public accounting profession, smdying au-
diting standards, professional ethics, the leg-
al liability inherent in the attest function, the
study and evaluation of internal control, the
nature of evidence, the growing use of statis-
tical sampling, the impact of electronic data
processing, and the basic approach to plan-

American Studies

ning an audit. Finally, various audit reports
expressing independent expert opinions on
the fairness of financial statements are stu-
died. Prerequisites: Accounting 221,
Mathematics 103, and Computer Science
JOS.

441 FEDERAL INCOME TAX

Analysis of the provisions of the Internal
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc-
tions, inventories, and accounting methods.
Practical problems involving determination
of income and deductions, capital gains and
losses, computation and payment of taxes
through withholding at the source and
through delcaration are considered. Planning
transactions so that a minimum amount of tax
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite:
Accounting 1 10 or consent of instructor.

442 FEDERAL INCOME TAX
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal
Revenue Code relating to partnerships,
estates, trusts, and corporations An exten-
sive series of problems is considered, and
effective tax planning is emphasized. Prere-
quisite: Accounting 441 .

443 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING I

Cenain areas of advanced accounting theory,
including business combin.ilions and con-
solidated financial statements. Prerequisite:
Accounting 221 . One-half unit of credit.

444 CONTROLLERSHIP

Control process in the organization. General
systems theory, financial control systems,
centralization-decentralization, performance
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and
budgets, and marketing, production and fi-
nance models for control purposes. Prere-
quisite: Accounting 331 or consent of in-
structor.

445 AUDITING PRACTICE

An audit project is presented, solved and
the auditor's report written. THIS
COURSE IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS
WHO HAVE EITHER COMPLETED
OR ARE ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING
440. One-half unit of credit. Grade will be
recorded as "P" or "F."

446 SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS
AND FASB STANDARDS

A seminar course for accounting majors with
library assignments to gain a workable
understanding of the highly technical opin-
ions of the Accounting Principles Board and
standards of the Financial Accounting Stan-
dards Board. One term paper. Possible trip to
New York City to attend a public hearing of
the Financial Accounting Standards Board
Prerequisite: Accounting 1 10. May term.

447 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II

An intensive study of partnerships, install-
ment and consignment sales, branch
accounting, bankruptcy and reorganization,
estates and trusts, government entities, and
non-profit organizations Prerequisite:
Accounting 221 . One-half unit of credit.

448 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS
FOR CPA CANDIDATES

Problems from the Accounting Practice
sections of Past CPA. examinations,
which require a thorough knowledge of the
core courses in their solution, are assigned.
The course is intended to meet the needs
of those interested in public accounting
and preparation for the Certified Public
Accountant's examination. Prerequisite:
Accounting 330 or consent of instructor.
One-half unit of credit. Grade will be
recorded as "P" or "F."

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See mdex)

Interns in accounting typically work off cam-
pus under the supervision of a public or pri-
vate accountant.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Typical examples of recent studies in
accountmg are: computer program to gener-
ate financial statements, educational core for
public accountants, inventory control, and
church taxation.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

ACCOUNTING —
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Associate Professor: Kuhns
(Coordinator)

The accounting-mathematical sciences
interdisciplinary major is designed to
offer, within a liberal-arts framework,
courses which will aid in constructing
mathematical models for business deci-
sion making. Students obtain the neces-
sary substantial background in both
mathematical sciences and accounting.
Required accounting courses are:
Accounting 110, 220-221, 330-331,
441, 442. In mathematical sciences re-
quired courses are; Computer Science
125 and 321 and Mathematics 1 12, 128,
129, 338 and either 103 or 332. Recom-
mended courses include: Mathematics

130, 238, 333; Business 223, 335, 336,
338, 339; Computer Science 108, 246;
Economics 110, 111; Psychology 224,
225; and Sociology-Anthropology 110,

AMERICAN STUDIES

Professor: Piper
(Coordinator)

The American Studies major offers a
comprehensive program in American
civilization which introduces students to
the complexities underlying the develop-
ment of America and its contemporary
life. Thirteen courses are included.

FOUR CORE REQUIREMENTS —
The primary integrating units of the ma-
jor, these courses, some team-taught,
will encourage students to consider ideas
from different points of view and help
them to correlate information and
methods from various disciplines:

1. America As a Civilization: American
Studies 200 (First semester of major
study)

2. American Tradition in the Arts and
Literature: American Studies 220

3. Research and Methodology: History
449 or Sociology/ Anthro 447 (junior
or senior year)

4. Internship or Independent Study
(Junior or senior year)

CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six
courses in one option and three in the
other are needed. Six primary concentra-
tion-option courses in American Arts or
American Society build around the in-
sights gained in the core courses. They
focus particular attention on areas most
germane to academic and vocational in-
terests. The three additional courses
from the other option give further
breadth to an understanding of America.
Students also will be encouraged to take
elective courses relating to other cul-
tures.

Students should design their American
Studies major in consultation with the
program coordinator.

Art

American Arts Concentration Option

Art 332 — American Art of the 20th Century
English 222 — American Literature I
English 223 — American Literature II
Music 128 — American Music
N 80 — Studies in American Music
Theatre Studies — American Theatre

American Society
Concentration Option

Economics 224 — Urban Problems

History 442 — U.S. Social and Intellectual History

to 1877

History 443 — U.S. Social and Intellectual History

since 1877

Political Science 331 — Civil Rights and Liberties

Political Science 335 — Law and Society

Sociology 334 — Racial and Cultural Minorities

200 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural.
economic, and political perspectives of
American civlizatlon with special attention
to the interrelationships between these va-
rious onentations. May be taken for either
one-half unit (Section 200A) or full unit
(Section 200B); declared majors and
prospective majors should take the full-unit
course, 200B. Alternate years.

220 AMERICAN TRADITION IN
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE
The relationship of the arts and literature to
the various historical periods of American
life.

470-479 INTERNSHIP
N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

ART —

Professors: Bogle, Shipley
Assistant Professors: Golahny

(Chairperson), Willis
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier:

Bartons, Barrie, Lash, Pitynski
The Art Department offers two majors
in the B.A. Degree (Studio Art and Art
History) and a second degree program,
a B.F.A. Degree in Sculpture.

The B.A. Degree — Studio Art

To complete a Bachelor of Arts
degree with a major in studio art, the
student must complete the seven-course
foundation program, the requirements

for an area of specialization and partici-
pate in senior exhibition.

Foundation Program

Art 1 1 1 Drawing I

Art 115 Two-Dimensional Design

Art 116 Figure Modeling

Art 212 Color Theory

Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-histor>'

Through the Middle Ages
Art 223 Survey of Art: From the

Renaissance Through the Modern Age
Art 227 Introduction to Photography

Areas of Specialization

I. Fainting

Art 220 Painting I

Art 221 Drawing II

Art 330 Painting II

Art 446 Studio Research

and two art history courses num-
bered
300 or above.

II. Printmaking

Art 22 1 Drawing II

Art 228 Printmaking I

Art 338 Printmaking II

Art 446 Studio Research

and two art history courses num-
bered
300 or above.

III. Sculpture

Art 225 Sculpture I

Art 226 Figure Modeling II

Art 335 Sculpture II

Art 446 Studio Research

and two art history courses numbered
300 and above.

IV. Commercial Design

Art 221 Drawing II

Art 311 Practicum in

Layout and Design

Art 312 Practicum in

Typographic Composition

Art 337 Photography II

Art 442 Special Projects with

Commercial Design
Art 443 Computer Graphics for

Commercial Design
CG0 511 Layout and Design

CG0 512 Typographic Composition

A student is encouraged to take
the following courses: Internship
(Art 470-479), Advertising (Business
332), Writing for Special Audiences
(Mass Communication 323), Intro-
duction to Mass Communication
(Mass Comm 1 10), Social Psy-
chology (Psy 224).

V. Generalist Art Major to be

taken by those students who are
seeking teaching certification in
Art):
Art 119 Ceramics I

Art 220 Painting I

Art 225 Sculpture I

Art 228 Printmaking I

and two art history courses num-
bered 300 or above. In addition to
Art Department courses, under the
generalist major, the student must
complete the art certification pro-
gram in the Education Department.

VI. Photography

Art 337 Photography II

Art 340 Color Photography

Art 341 Large Format View/

Camera Photography
Art 446 Student Research

and two art history courses numbered
300 or above.

The B.A. Degree — Art History

To complete a bachelor of arts degree
with a major in art history, a student
must take courses in art history, studio
art, and history and/or religion. A stu-
dent majoring in art history is advised to
take a foreign language.

Required of all students:
Art 222 Survey of Art: Pre-History
Through the Middle Ages
Art 223 Survey of Art: From

Renaissance Through the Modem Age
Art 447 Art History Research

Choose four of the following:
Art 331 20th Century European Art
Art 332 American Art of the 20th

Century

Art 333 19th Century European

and American Art

Art 334 Art of the Renaissance

Art

Art 336
Art 339

Art of the Baroque
Women in Art

Choose two of the following:
Art 1 1 1 Drawing I

Art 115 Two-dimensional Design

Art 116 Figure Modeling I

Art 227 Introduction to Photography

Choose two of the following:
History 210 Ancient History

History 212 Medieval Europe and its

Neighbors
History 418 History of Renaissance

Thought
Religion 113 Old Testament Faith

and History
Religion 114 New Testament Faith

and History
Religion 226 Biblical Archaeology

It is furthermore suggested that the
student choose electives in other depart-
ments that may complement the studies
of art history. Among these recom-
mended electives are:

French 412 French Literature of the
19th Century
English 336 Shakespeare

Music 117 Survey of Western Music
Music 335 History of Western Music I
Music 336 History of Western Music II
Theatre 332 History of Theatre I

Theatre 333 History of Theatre II

The BFA degree in sculpture:

The student completes a specified
course of study in the Art Department,
the Lycoming College distribution re-
quirements, and one of the field spe-
cialization apprenticeship programs at
the Johnson Atelier in Mercerville, New
Jersey.

The Art Department course of study
consists of 12 courses in studio and art
history; Figure Modeling I and II (Art
1 16 and 226), Sculpture I and II (Art 225
and 335), Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and
221), Introduction to Photography (Art
227), 2-D Design (Art 115), Survey of
Art (Art 222 and 223), and two addition-
al courses in Art History (Art 331 , 332,
333, 334, 336, 339).

Twelve additional course units are re-
quired of the student. The student must
meet the requirements of the distribution
program within these courses.

The student must also complete one of
the field specialization apprenticeships at
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of
Sculpture in Mercerville, New Jersey.
This requires the student to be at the
Johnson Atelier for a period of between
16 and 23 '/2 months. The student re-
ceives eight course units of credit at
Lycoming College for successfully com-
pleting the field specialization appren-
ticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is expected
that the work for the apprenticeship com-
ponent will be completed during the
summers and the junior year.

Admission to the BFA degree program
is on the basis of meeting the admission
standards of Lycoming College, and pas-
sing a portfolio review and interview by
members of the Lycoming College Art
Department.

Five minors are being offered by
the Art Department. Requirements for
each follow: Art History: Art 222, 223
and two advanced art history courses;
Commercial Design: Art 111, 115, 212,
223, 311, 312, 511 and 512; Painting:
Art 111, 115, 220, 330 and 221 or 223;
Photography: Art 111, 212, 223, 227,
337 and 340 or 341 ; Sculpture: Art 1 16,
225, 226, 335 and 111, 1 19 or 445.

1 1 1 DRAWING 1

Study of the human figure with gesture and
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar
with different drawing techniques and
media. Some drawings from namre. Offered
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and
III.

1 1 5 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN

The basic fundamentals found in the two-
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space,
color, and composition are taught in rela-
tionship to the other two-dimensional arts.
Perceptual theories and their relationships to
what and why we see what we see in art are
discussed with each problem.

1 16 FIGURE MODELING I
Understanding the figure will be approached
through learning the basic structures and
proportions of the figure. The course is con-
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class.
At least one figure per student will be cast.

119 CERAMICS 1

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it re-
lates to function of vessels and the design
parameters imposed by the characteristics of
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught
to encourage expression rather than to dis-
pense merely a technical body of informa-
tion.

212 COLOR THEORY

A study of the physical and emotional
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for
the artist. The color theories of Johannes
Itten will form the base for this course with
some study of the theories of Albert Mun-
sell, Faber Birren, and Wilhelm Ostwald.

220 PAINTING I

An introduction of painting techniques and
materials. Coordination of color, value, and
design within the painting is taught. Some
painting from the figure. No limitations as to
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre-
requisite: Art 115 or consent of instructor.

221 DRAWING II

Continued study of the human figure. Emph-
asis is placed on realism and figure-ground
coordination with the use of value and de-
sign. Prerequisite: Art III.

Ill SURVEY OF ART: PRE-HISTORY
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES
A survey of Western architecture, sculpture,
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation
of form and content and on the relatedness of
the visual arts to their cultural environment:
Paleolithic Art, Near East. Egypt, Greece,
Rome, and Medieval Europe.

223 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE
MODERN AGE

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture,
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation
of form and content and on the relatedness of
the visual arts to their cultural environment:
I4th-20th centuries.

225 SCULPTURE I

An introduction to the techniques, materials,
and ideas of sculpmre. Clay, plaster, wax,
wood, and other materials will be used. The
course will be concerned with ideas about
sculpture as expression, and with giving
material form to ideas.

226 HGURE MODELING H

Will exploit the structures and understand-
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce
larger, more complex figurative works.
There will be a requirement to cast one of the
works in plaster. Prerequisites: Art 116 and
consent of instructor.

Art

111 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY

Objectives of the course are to develop
technical skills in the use of photographic
equipment (cameras, films, darkroom,
printmaker) and to develop sensitivity in
the areas of composition, form, light,
picture quality, etc. Each student must
own or have access to a 35mm camera
capable of full manual operation.

228 PRINTMAKING I

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen,
intaglio, monotype, and lithography print-
ing. One edition of at least six piints must be
completed in each area. Prerequisite: An
111 or 115 or consent of instructor .

229 CERAMICS II

Continuation of Ceramics I . Emphasis on use
of the wheel and technical aspects such as
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite:
Art 119.

311 PRACTICUM IN LAYOUT AND
DESIGN

Utilization of commercial design techniques
and skills in an applied setting through
work experience. Students will produce
images and do layout work primarily with
on-campus departments and offices. Stu-
dents must take 311 concurrently with
GCO 511, Layout and Design. One hour
credit. Open onlv to students enrolled in
GCO 511.

312 PRACTICUM IN TYPOGRAPHIC
COMPOSITION

Utilization of commercial design techniques
and skills in an applied setting through
work experience. Students will produce
images and do layout work primarily with
on-campus departments and offices. Stu-
dents must take 312 concurrently with
GCO 512. Typographic Composition. One
hour credit. Open only to students enrolled
in GCO 512.

330 PAINTING II

Emphasis is placed on individual style and
technique. Artists and movements in art are
studied. No limitations as to painting media,
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art
220.

331 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1880
to the present, including Cubism, Fauvism,
Expressionism. Dada, and Surrealism
Picasso, Matisse, Kandinsky, and Mondrian
are among the major artists studied.

332 AMERICAN ART OF THE
20TH CENTURY

The art of the United States from about 1 880
to the present, with emphasis on the innova-

tions of Americans in painting, sculpture and
architecture, and on the meaning and histor-
ical roots of contemporary art.

333 I9TH CENTURY EUROPEAN
AND AMERICAN ART

The art of Western Europe and the United
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on
painting in France. Those artists to be studied
include David and Goya, Delacroix. Cour-
bet. The Impressionists, Turner, Homer,
Cole and Eakins.

334 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE

The art of Italy and Northern Europe from
1330-1530, with emphasis on the painters
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci.
Raphael. Titan, Van Eyck. and Diirer, the
sculptors Ghiberti, Donatello and Miche-
langelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and
Alberti.

335 SCULPTURE II

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225).
Emphasis is on advanced technical process.
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture
will be done in the school foundry. Prere-
quisite: Art 225.

336 ART OF THE BAROQUE

Seventeenth-century painting and sculpture
in Italy and the Netherlands with emphasis
on Bernini, Poussin, Rubens, and Rem-
brandt, and with special attention given to
the expressive, narrative, painterly, and tac-
tile styles present in their art.

337 PHOTOGRAPHY II

To extend the skills developed in Photogra-
phy I (Art 227) by continued growth in
technical expertise including instruction in
the use and capabilities of large format
view cameras. Emphasis is placed on
conceptual and aesthetic aspects of
photography. Prerequisite: Art 227.

338 PRINTMAKING II

Further study of the techniques of silkscreen,
intaglio, monotype, and lithography printing
with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity
printing. Two editions of at least six prints
must be completed in each of two areas.
Prerequisite: Art 228.

339 WOMEN IN ART

A survey of women artists from a variety of
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social,
political and economic — which seeks to
understand and integrate the contributions of
women artists into the mainstream of the
history of art. No prerequisite.

340 COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of
color photography. Work will be directed

towards the use of both color negative and
color slide processes. Students will be
required to learn the special requirements
of photographing in both indoor and
outdoor light conditions. A portfolio
of color prints will be produced. Pre-
requisites: Art 227 and 337.

341 LARGE FORMAT VIEW CAMERA
PHOTOGRAPHY

Study of the techniques and aesthetics of
the large format view camera in Fine Art
Photography. Emphasis will be placed on
the experience of using the large format
view camera. Students will be encouraged
to explore alternative photographic pro-
cesses such as platinum printing, the gum
bichromate process, etc. using the large
negative produced. Prerequisites: An 227
and 337.

440 PAINTING III

Professional quality is stressed. There is
some experimentation with new painting
techniques and styles.

441 DRAWING 111

Continued study of human figure, individual
style, and professional control of drawing
techniques and media are now emphasized.

442 SPECIAL PROJECT IN COMMERCIAL
DESIGN

Concentrated research, preparation and
execution of a series of projects in com-
mercial design utilizing the traditional
studio tools including airbrush, water-
based mediums, colored pencils, and pen
and ink. The following skills are involved:
illustration, paste-up, typesetting, over-
lays, lettering and layout. Prerequisite:
GCO 511, 512 or consent of instructor.

443 COMPUTER GRAPHICS FOR
COMMERCIAL DESIGN
Concentrated research, preparation and
execution of a series of projects in com-
mercial design utilizing computer imaging.
Students will learn to generate original
moving and still images in color using
existing graphic creation software and
peripheral devices, such as digitalizing
cameras, digitalizing drawing devices,
printers, and slide producers. Prerequisite:
COO 511, 512 or consent of instructor.

445 SCULPTURE III

In Sculpture III the student is expected to
produce a series of sculptures that follow a
conceptual and technical line of develop-
ment. Prerequisites: Art 116. 225. and 335.

446 STUDIO RESEARCH

Independent research in an elective studio
area, conducted under the supervision of the

Art

appropriate faculty member, includes crea-
tion of work which may be incorporated in
the senior group exhibition. Student works in
private studio assigned by the department.

447 ART HISTORY RESEARCH

Independent research, conducted under the
supervision of the appropriate faculty mem-
ber, includes the research and writing of a
thesis, to be presented to a committee of Art
Department faculty.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Commercial design, interior design, and
photography programs in local businesses,
and museum work at the Lycoming County
Historical Museum.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)

Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art
nouveau, lithography, photography, pottery,
problems in illustration, and watercolor.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

Graphic Arts

Through special arrangements, the
following courses offered at Pennsylvania
College of Technology are available only
to Art majors in Commercial Design.
The Penn College courses are taken as
part of the student's schedule and are
listed with Lycoming's offerings during
registration periods.

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques
used in preparation of copy for reproduction;
paste-up and color separation overlays. 3 cr.

512 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION
Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and
practice in the care and use of composing
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold
(photo). 3 cr.

ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS

Associate Professor: Erickson
Assistant Professors: Fisher, Wolfe
(Chairperson)

The department offers two majors.
The major in astronomy is specifically
designed to train students in the field of
planetarium education; it also may serve
as a basis for earning state certification as

a secondary school teacher of general
science. The major in physics can pre-
pare students for graduate work in phy-
sics, astronomy, and related physical sci-
ences, for the cooperative program in
engineering, for state certification as
secondary school teachers of physics, or
for technical positions in industry.

Astronomy

The major in astronomy requires
Astronomy 111, either 112 or 113, 230,
344, 445 and 446; Physics 225-226;
Mathematics 128 and 129; and Chemis-
try 1 10 and 1 1 1 or 330-331 . Juniors and
seniors majoring in astronomy are also
required to register for four semesters of
Astronomy 349 & 449 (non-credit collo-
quia). In addition, the following cognate
courses are recommended: Physics 229
and 333; Philosophy 223 and 333; and
Art 227.

104 FIELD GEOLOGY

A methods course introducing the field tech-
niques needed to study the geology of an
area. May or summer term only.

105 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY

A comprehensive view of the evolution of
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to
the present, emphasizing the impact that
astronomical discoveries and the conquest of
space have had on Western culmre. May or
summer term only.

107 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY

A methods course providing the opportunity
to make a variety of astronomical observa-
tions, both visually and photographically,
with and without telescopes. The planetar-
ium is used to familiarize the student with the
sky at various times during the year and from
different locations on earth. May or summer
term only.

101 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B)
1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A)

A summary of current concepts of the uni-
verse from the solar system to distant galax-
ies. Describes the techniques and instru-
ments used in astronomical research. Pre-
sents not only what is reasonably well known
about the universe, but also considers some
of the major unsolved problems. Astronomy
101 and HI share the same three hours of
lecture and nvo hours of laboratory each
week. Ill has one additional hour each week
for more advanced mathematical treatment
of the material. Credit may not be earned for
both 101 and 111. Corequisite for 111:
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor.

102 EARTH SCIENCE (Bl

112 EARTH SCIENCE (A)

A study of the physical processes that con-
tinually affect the planet Earth, shaping our
environment. Describes how past events and
lifeforms can be reconstructed from pre-
served evidence to reveal the history of our
planet from its origin to the present. Empha-
sizes the ways in which geology, meteorolo-
gy, and oceanography interrelate with man
and the environment. Astronomy 102 and
112 share the same three hours of lecture and
rn'o hours of laboratory each week. 112 has
one additional hour each week for more adv-
anced mathematical treatment of the mate-
rial. Credit may not be earned for both 102
and 112. Corequisite for 112: Mathematics
107 or consent of instructor. Alterrmte years.

103 METEOROLOGY (B)

113 METEOROLOGY (A)

The general properties of the atmosphere and
their measurements will be discussed in
terms of basic physical laws. The large scale
processes that create a suitable climate for
life on Earth are discussed as well as the
smaller scale processes that must be taken
into account in scientific weather prediction.
Astronomy 103 and 113 share the same three
hours of lecture and fwo hours of laboratory
each week. 1 13 has one additional hour each
week for more advanced mathematical treat-
ment of the material. Credit may not be
earnedforboth 103 and 1 13. Corequisite for
113: Mathematics 107. Alternate years.

114 MANNED SPACE FLIGHT I

Traces the beginnings of rocketry and
spaceflight capability from Sputnik (1957)
through the conclusion of the Apollo
moon landings (1972). Extensive use of
NASA video and other audio-visual aids.
Examination of scientific, engineering and
political motivations. iVhen taken in May
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy
115. Not for distribution. Alternate years.
Half unit.

1 15 MANNED SPACE FLIGHT II
Examines manned spaceflight from Skylab
missions (1973-74) through Apollo-Soyuz
Test Project, early Space shuttle missions,
to current U.S. and Soviet space efforts.
Extensive use of NASA video. Exami-
nation of scientific, engineering, and
political motivations. fVhen taken in May
Term, must be scheduled with Astronomy
114. Not for distribution. Alternate years.
Half unit.

230 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES

A methods course covering major aspects of
planetarium programming, operation and
maintenance. Students are required to pre-
pare and present a planetarium show. Upon
successfully completing the course, students

Astronomy & Physics

are eligible to become planetariutn assis-
tants. Three hours of lecture and demonstra-
tion and three hours of practical training per
week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 101 or 1 1 1
(Principles of Astronomy) or consent of in-
structor. Alternate years.

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY

A detailed presentation of the special theory
of relativity, and a short view of the general
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con-
cepts of the universe, with particular atten-
tion to alternative modem cosmological
models. Discussion of the Cosmological
Principle, its rationale, and its implications.
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere-
quisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of
Astronomy A ) and Physics 225 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years.
Cross-listed as Physics 344.

445 STELLAR EVOLUTION

The physical principles governing the inter-
nal structure and external appearance of
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and
transport within stars. The evolution of stars
from initial formation to final stages. The
creation of chemical elements by nuc-
leosynthesis. Four hours of lecture per week.
Prerequisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of
Astronomy A) and Physics 226 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus II). Alternate years.

446 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND
GALACTIC STRUCTURE

The motion of objects in gravitational fields.
Introduction to the n-body problem. The re-
lation between stellar motions and the galac-
tic potential. The large scale structure of
galaxies in general and of the Milky Way
Galaxy in particular. Four hours of lecture
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 111
(Principles of Astronomy A) and Physics 225
(Introductory Physics with Calculus I).
Alternate years.

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy
and physics offers students a chance to meet
and hear active scientists in astronomy, phy-
sics, and related scientific areas talk about
their own research or professional activities.
In addition, majors in astronomy and physics
must present two lectures, one given during
the junior year and one given during the
senior year, on the results of a literature sur-
vey or on individual research. Students
majoring in this department are required to
attend four semesters during the junior and
senior years. A letter grade will be given
when the student gives a lecture. Otherwise
the grade will be P/F. Students in the Coop-
erative Program in Liberal Arts and En-
gineering are required to attend two semes-

ters and present one lecture during their
junior year. Non-credit course. One hour per
week. Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449.

AlQ-il') INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Independent studies may be undertaken in
most areas of astronomy.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

Physics

The major in physics requires Physics
225-226, 331, 332, and four additional
physics courses numbered 229 and
above. Up to two courses chosen from
Astronomy 111, 112, 1 13, 445, and 446
may substitute for two of the four physics
electives. Also required are Mathematics
1 28 and 1 29 , and Chemistry 1 1 0 and 1 1 1
or 330-33 1 . Juniors and seniors majoring
in physics are required to register for four
semesters of Physics 349 & 449 (non-
credit colloquia). In addition, the follow-
ing cognate courses are recommended:
Mathematics 231 and 238 (these are re-
quired for the cooperative engineering
program and by most graduate schools);
Computer Science 125 (required for the
cooperative engineering program); and
Philosophy 223 and 333. A foreign lan-
guage is recommended for students plan-
ning on graduate study.

106 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and
power. The various energy sources available
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geoth-
ermal. The advantages and disadvantages of
each energy conversion method, including
availability, efficiency, and environmental
effects. Present areas of energy research and
possible fumre developments. Projections of
possible future energy demands. Exercises
and experiments in energy collection, con-
version, and utilization. May or summer
term only.

125-126

PHYSICS WITH LIFE
SCIENCE APPLICATIONS

The basic concepts, principles, and laws of
physics are presented in this noncalculus in-

troductory physics course. Topics include
mechanics, elastic properties of matter,
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and
magnetism, waves, optics, and radioactiv-
ity. Many of the examples and problems used
to illustrate the physics are selected from the
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one
hour of recitation, and one three-hour
labora'ory per week. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor.
(Credit may not be earned for both 125 and
225 or for both 126 and 226.).

225-226 INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS
WITH CALCULUS
A mathematically rigorous introduction to
physics designed for majors in physics,
astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics.
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics,
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics,
and modem physics. Five hours of lecture
and recitation and one three-hour laboratory
per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 128-
129 (Calculus I and II). (Credit may not be
earned for both 125 and 225 or for both 126
and 226).

229 ELECTRONICS

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory,
active devices such as transistors, oper-
ational amphfiers, integrated circuits, and
introduction to digital electronics will be
covered. Three lectures and two two-hour
laboratory sessions per week. Prerequisites:
Physics 226 and Mathematics 128 or con-
sent of instructor. Alternate years.

331 MECHANICS

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro-
duction to the mechanics of continuous
media. Moving reference frames. Lagran-
gian mechanics. Four hours of lecture and
three hours of laboratory per week. Prere-
quisites: Physics 225 (Introductory Physics
with Calculus I) and Mathematics 129 (Cal-
culus II).

332 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM

The electromagnetic field, electrical poten-
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magne-
tic properties of matter. Electric circuits.
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes
electronics as well as classical electricity and
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal-
culus II).

333 OPTICS

Geometrical optics, optical systems, phys-
ical optics, interference, Fraunhofer and
Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and
lasers will be covered. Three hours of
lecture and three hours of laboratory per

Astronomy and Physics

week. Prerequisites: Physics 226 and
Mathematics 128 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

336 MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF
PHYSICS

Solution of ordinary linear differential
equations using power and Laplace trans-
forms, nonlinear differential and coupled
differential equations, Fourier analysis
using both trigonometric and complex
exponential functions, complex variables,
eigenvalue problems, infinite dimensional
vector spaces, partial differential equations,
boundary value problem solutions to the
wave equation, heat flow equation, and
Laplace's equation. Prerequisites: Math
231 and 238. Alternate years.

337 THERMODYNAMICS AND
STATISTICAL MECHANICS
Classical thermodynamics will be presented,
showing that the macroscopic properties of a
system can be specified without a knowledge
of the microscopic properties of the consti-
tuents of the system. Then statistical mecha-
nics will be developed, showing that these
same macroscopic properties are determined
by the microscopic properties. Four hours of
lecture and recitation per week. Prere-
quisites: Physics 226 (Introductory Physics
with Calculus II) and Mathematics 129 (Cal-
culus II). Alterruue years.

338 ATOMIC AND
MOLECULAR PHYSICS

The development of the principles and
methods of quantum mechanics from the ear-
liest evidence of quantization. Structure and
spectra of atoms and molecules. Extension of
quantum theory to the solid state. Four hours
of lecture and recitation and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Physics
226 (Introductory Physics with Calculus II)
and Mathematics 129 (Calculus II). Alter-
nate years.

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY

A detailed presentation of the special theory
of relativity, and a short view of the general
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con-
cepts of the universe, with particular atten-
tion to alternative modem cosmological
models. Discussion of the Cosmological
Principle, its rationale, and its implications.
Four hours of lecture per week. Prere-
quisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of
Astronomy A) arul Physics 225 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years.
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344.

439 INTRODUCTION TO

QUANTUM MECHANICS

Basic concepts and formulation of quantum

theory. The free particle, the simple harmo-

nic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and cen-
tral force problems will be discussed. Both
time-independent and time-dependent per-
turbation theory will be covered. Four hours
of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite: either
Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with Cal-
culus II) or Chemistry 331 (Physical Chemis-
try II). and Mathematics 231 (Dijferential
Equations). Cross-listed as Chemistry 439.

447 NUCLEAR AND

PARTICLE PHYSICS

The course will consider properties of
nuclei, nuclear models, radioactivity,
nuclear reactions (including fission and
fusion), and properties of elementary
particles. The interactions of nuclear
particles with matter and the detection of
nuclear particles will be covered. It will be
shown how observed phenomena lead to
theories on the nature of fundamental
interactions, how these forces act at the
smallest measurable distances, and what
is expected to occur at even smaller dis-
tances. Four hours of lecture and recila-
lion and two hours of laboratory per week.
Prerequisites: Physics 226 (Introductory
Physics with Calculus II), Mathematics
129, and either Physics 338 (Atomic and
Molecular Physics) or Chemistry 1 10.
Alternate years.

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Interns in physics work off campus under the
supervision of professional physicists em-
ployed by local industries or hospitals.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Independent smdies may be undertaken in
most areas of physics.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

BIOLOGY

Professor: Angstadt

(Chairperson)
Associate Professors: Diehl, Gabriel,

Zaccaria, Zimmerman

A major consists of eight biology
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222,
223, 224, and 225. In addition, juniors
and seniors majoring in Biology are re-
quired to register for Biology 349/449
(non-credit colloquium) during all
semesters on campus. With departmental
consent, Biology 226 may be substituted
for Biology 221 . Only two courses num-
bered below 200 may count toward the
major. Departmental internships cannot
be used to fulfill the eighth required
course. In addition, three units of che-
mistry and two units of mathematical sci-
ence are required. The chemistry re-
quirement must include at least one unit
of organic chemistry chosen from Che-
mistry 115, 220, or 221. The mathema-
tical science courses must be chosen
from Computer Science 108, 125 and
Mathematics 103, 107, 109, 128 or
above. Certain specific exceptions to the
core program will be made for three-year
students enrolled in cooperative prog-
rams. Such exceptions are noted under
the particular cooperative program de-
scribed in the Academic Program chapter
of the catalog. Students interested in
these programs should contact the prog-
ram director before finalizing their indi-
vidual programs. Credit may not be
earned for both Biology 101 and 1 10 or
for both Biology 102 and 111. Consent
of instructor may replace Biology 1 10-
111 as a prerequisite for all biology
courses.

A minor in Biology requires the com-
pletion of four upper-level (200's or
higher) courses, with their appropriate
prerequisites. At least two of these must
be from the 200 's series of courses. A
minor with a special name (e.g.. En-
vironmental Science) may be designed
by an individual.

Biology

101-102 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY

An investigation of biological principles, in-
cluding ecological systems, form and func-
tion in selected representative organisms
(especially man), cell theory, molecular
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adapta-
tion, and evolution. The course is designed
primarily for students not planning to major
in the biological sciences. Three hours o)
lecture and one mo-hour laboratory per
week.

110-111 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY

An introduction to the study of biology de-
signed for students planning to major in the
biological sciences. Major topics considered
include the origin of life, cellular respiration
and photosynthesis, genetics, development,
anatomy and physiology, ecology, behavior,
and evolution. Three hours of lecture and
one three-hour laboratory per week.

113-114 HUMAN ANATOMY
AND PHYSIOLOGY
Using the organ-systems approach, the
course is an introduction to the human body
— its anatomy, physiology, and normal de-
velopment — with particular attention to
structure and function at all levels of its
biological organization (molecular through
organismal). Three hours of lecture, one
hour of discussion, and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Chemis-
try 115 or Chemistry 220 or consent of in-
structor.

221 MICROBIOLOGY

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is
given to the identification and physiology of
microorganisms as well as to their role \n
disease, their economic importance, and in-
dustrial applications. Three hours of lecture
and two two-hour laboratory periods per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Not
open to students who have received credit for
Biology 226.

222 GENETICS

A general consideration of the principles
governing inheritance, including treatment
of classical, molecular, cytological. phy-
siological, microbial, human, and popula-
tion genetics . Three hours of lecture and mo
two-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre-
requisite: Biology 1 10-111 .

223 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY

The mechanisms and functions of animal
systems, including the autonomic, endoc-
rine, digestive, cardio-vascular, respiratory,
renal, nervous, and reproductive systems.
Mammalian physiology is stressed. Three
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora-
tory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-
111.

224 ECOLOGY

The study of the principles of ecology with
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical,
and biological factors affecting the distribu-
tion and succession of plant and animal
populations and communities. Included will
be field studies of local habitats as well as
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111.

225 PLANT SCIENCES

A survey of the structure, development,
function, classification, and use of plants and
related organisms. The study will comprise
four general topic areas: form, including
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth
and reproduction; function, concentrating on
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo-
synthetic organisms; classification systems
and plant identification, and human uses of
plants. Three hours of lecture and one three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisite:
Biology 110-111.

226 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE

HEALTH SCIENCES
A study of microorganisms with emphasis
given to their taxonomy and their role in
various aspects of human infectious disease.
Mechanisms for treating and preventing in-
fectious diseases will be presented. Labora-
tory to include diagnostic culture proce-
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serolo-
gy, anaerobic techniques and a study of
hemolytic reactions. Three hours of lecture
and four hours of laboratory per week. Pre-
requisites: one year of introductory level
biology, one year of chemistry or consent of
instructor. Not open to students who have
received credit for Biology 221 .

328 AQUATIC BIOLOGY

A field-oriented course dealing with fresh-
water ecosystems . Studies will include a sur-
vey of the plankton, benthos, and fish — as
well as the physical and chemical character-
istics of water that influence their distribu-
tion. Several local field trips and a one-week
trip to a field station will familiarize students
with the diversity of habitats and the techni-
ques of limnologists. Alternative May terms.
Prerequisites: Biology 110-111.

329 TROPICAL MARINE BIOLOGY

A field oriented course where students study
the creatures of the fringing reefs, barrier
reefs, lagoons, turtlegrass beds and man-
grove swamps at a tropical marine labora-
tory . Studies will include survey of plankton .
invertebrates, and fish as well as the physical
and chemical characteristics that influence
their distribution. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-
111. Alternate May terms.

330 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY
OF VERTEBRATES

Detailed examination of the origins, struc-
ture, and functions of the pnncipal organs of
the vertebrates. Special attention is given to
the progressive modification of organs from
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alter-
nate yeai s.

334 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla
with emphasis on phylogeny. physiology,
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour
lecture/ laboratory periods per week. Prere-
quisite: Biology 110-1! 1 . Alternate years.

335 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY
Physicochemical background of cellular
function; functions of membrane systems
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio-
chemical and cellular bases of growth, de-
velopment and responses of organisms.
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Biology
110-111 and a year of chemistry. Alternate
years.

336 EVOLUTION

The study of the origin and modification
of life on earth. Topics discussed include
molecular evolution, population genetics,
gene flow, natural selection, sexual se-
lection, kin selection, neutral theory,
extinction, co-evolution, and the evolution
of man. Four hours of lecture per week.
Prerequisite: Biology 110-111 or consent
of the instructor. Alternate years.

339 MEDICAL GENETICS

This course is concerned with the rela-
tionships of heredity to disease. Discussions
will focus on topics such as chromosomal
abnormalities, metabolic vanation and dis-
ease, somatic cell genetics, genetic screen-
ing, and immunogenetics. Laboratory exer-
cises will offer practical experiences in gene-
tic diagnostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biol-
ogy 101-102 or 110-111. May term only.

342 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR

A study of the causation, function, evolu-
tion, and biological significance of animal
behaviors in their normal environment and
social contexts. Three hours of lecture arul
one four-hour laboratory each week. Prere-
quisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate years.

346 VIROLOGY

An introduction to the study of viruses.
The course will coven virus anatomy and
reproduction, diseases caused by viruses,
modern treatments of viral infections and

Biology

viral vaccines produced by recombinant
DNA and other technologies. Course
content will also include a description of
how viruses are used as tools for genetic
engineering and for studying cellular
processes like membrane signal trans-
duction, regulation of genetic expression
and oncogenesis (cancer). Four hours of
lecture per week. Prerequisite: Biology
1 10-11 1 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.

347 IMMUNOLOGY

The course introduces concepts concerning
how pathogens cause disease and host de-
fense mechanisms against infectious dis-
eases. Characterization of and relationships
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies
are presented. Serological assays will in-
clude: agglutination precipitations, im-
munofluorescence, immunoeletrophoresis,
and complement fixation. Other topics are:
immediate and delayed hypersensitivies
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison
ivy), immunological renal diseases, im-
munohematology (blood groups, etc.)
hybridome technology, the chemistry and
function of complement autoimmunity,
and organ graft rejection phenomena.
Three hours of lecture, one three-hour
laboratory, and one hour of arranged
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology
110-111. Alternate years.

403 HELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS

A methods course for students prepanng to
teach biology. Sources and methods of col-
lecting and preserving various plant and
animal materials. Summer term only.

431 HISTOLOGY

A study of the basic body tissues and the
microscopic anatomy of the organs and
structures of the body which are formed from
them. Focus is on normal human histology.
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology
110-111. Alternate years.

433 ECONOMIC AND

SYSTEMATIC BOTANY
Structure and classification of plants with
emphasis on those species, particularly food
and drug plants, having significance for hu-
man affairs. Three hours of lecture and one
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere-
quisites: Biology 110-111. Biology 225.
Alternate years.

440 PARASITOLOGY AND

MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY
The biology of parasites and parasitism. Stu-
dies on the major groups of animal parasites
and anthropod vectors of disease will involve
taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis will be
made on parasites of medical and veterinary

importance. Three hours of lecture and one
three-hour laboratory per week. Prere-
quisite: Biology 1 10-11 1 . Alternate years.

441 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY

A study of the development of vertebrates
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus.
Particular attention is given to the chick and
human as representative organisms. Two
three-hour lecture/ laboratory periods per
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alter-
nate years.

444 BIOCHEMISTRY

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car-
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,
and nucleic acids; integration of metabol-
ism; and biochemical control mechanisms,
including allosteric control, induction,
repression signal transduction as well as
the various types of of inhibitive control
mechanisms. Three hours of lecture, one
three-hour laboratory and one hour of
arranged work per week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 220-221 or Chemistry 115, or
consent of instructor. Cross-listed as
Chemistry 444. A Iternate years.

445 RADIATION BIOLOGY

A study of the effects of ionizing and non-
ionizing radiations on cells, tissues and
organisms. Consideration will be given to
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien-
cies elucidate the nature of radiation dam-
age. Three hours of lecture undone three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
Biology 110-111, one year of chemistry.
A Iternate years.

446 PLANT ANATOMY

AND PHYSIOLOGY

A study of plant physiology as a function of
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and
environmental factors will be examined from
a background of the structure and develop-
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole
plants. Three hours of lecture undone three-
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites:
Biology llO-lll, Biology 225. Alternate

448 ENDOCRINOLOGY

This course begins with a survey of the role
of the endocrine hormones in the integration
of body functions. This is followed by a
study of the control of hormone synthesis and
release, and a consideration of the mechan-
isms by which hormones accomplish their
effects on target organs. Two three-hour lec-
ture/laboratory periods per week. Prere-
quisite: Biology 110-111. Alternate years.

349 & 449 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM

This course offers the student a chance to
become familiar with research in the Biolo-

gical Sciences using techniques such as
meeting and talking with active researchers,
reading and critically analyzing the current
literature, and discussing the ideas and
methods shaping Biology. Students will be
required to read and analyze scientific pap-
ers, actively participate in discussions.
Students majoring in this department are
required to enroll during all semesters
spent on campus in the junior and senior
years. The grade will be P/F. Non-credit
course. One hour per week. Prerequisites:
Biology majors with junior or senior class
standing.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Recent samples of internships in the depart-
ment include ones with the Department of
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)

Departmental studies are experimentally
oriented and may entail either lab or field
work.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
Examples of recent honors projects have in-
volved stream analysis, gypsy moth re-
search, drug synthesis and testing.

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Associate Professor: Weaver

(Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Sterngold
Instructors: Henninger, Roberts
Lecturer: Larrabee

To graduate with a major in business
administration, a student must complete
one of two tracks:

Track I — Business Management

This track is designed to train students
in the functions of today " s profit and non-
profit organizations. The program pro-
vides a well-balanced preparation for a
wide variety of careers, including gener-
al administration, personnel administra-
tion, commercial banking, investments
and portfolio management, security
analysis, corporate financial manage-
ment, general marketing, sales, product
management, advertising, retail mer-

Business Administration

chandising, and production and manu-
facturing management.

Required courses are Business 110,
111, 223, 228, 329, 338, 339, 440, 441;
Mathematics 103. Business 332 or 443
may be substituted for Business 329 and
Business 340 may be substituted for
Business 339. Accounting 110 may
be substituted for Business 1 10 if the
student is transferring into the busi-
ness administration major, but duplicate
credit will not be granted.

Majors are encouraged to take Busi-
ness 335, 336; Computer Science 108;
Economics 110, 111; Mass Communi-
cation 211, 323; Mathematics 112;
Philosophy 216; and Psychology 225.
Majors also are encouraged to take
a foreign language. The additional
elective offerings are intended to
add depth in the areas of finance,
marketing, and management.

Track II — Management Science

This track is designed to train students
in the quantitative aspects of business
administration. It provides excellent
undergraduate preparation for graduate
study in management science, operations
research, and quantitative business
administration. The program also pro-
vides a solid preparation for careers in
production control, systems analysis, re-
search, forecasting, industrial and tech-
nical sales and any of the functional areas
of business where quantitative training
would be an added qualification.

Required courses are Business 110,
111, 223, 338; 339, 446; Economics
110, 111, 441; Mathematics 103, 112,
128, 129, 338; and Computer Science
108. Accounting 110 may be substituted
for Business 110 if the student is trans-
ferring into the business administration
major.

Minors

The Business Administration Depart-
ment offers two minors. The following
courses are required to complete a minor
in Marketing: Business 228, 329, 332,
445, and 443 or 448. A minor in Finance
requires the completion of Business 338,
339, 340, and Economics 220, 441, or
Accounting 225.

110 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

An introduction to the art of measuring,
communicating, and interpreting financial
activity. Recording, classifying and sum-
marizing business transactions, the inter-
pretation of accounts, and the preparation
of financial statements are studied. Not
open to students who have received credit
for Accounting 110.

1 1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING

An introduction to the various components of
managerial accounting. Emphasis is placed
on managerial problem solving techniques
and the analysis of the results. Accounting
systems, costing procedures, cost-volume
profit relationships, managerial control pro-
cesses and the use of computers as aids to
decision making are studied. Students will
gain hands-on experience with various com-
puter applications of managerial accounting.
Prerequisite: Business 110 or Accounting
110.

223 QUANTITATIVE

BUSINESS ANALYSIS
Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in
making business decisions. Topics include:
decision theory, inventory models, network
models, forecasting, and other selected ap-
plications. Students will be introduced to
computer applications of the quantitative
models. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103 or
consent of instructor.

228 MARKETING PRINCIPLES

A study of the methods used by business
and nonprofit organizations to design,
price, promote and distribute their products
and services. Topics include new product
development, advertising, retailing, con-
sumer behavior, marketing strategy, ethical
issues in marketing and others. Readings,
case studies, library assignments and team
research projects.

329 MARKETING STRATEGY

A study of the methods used by business
and nonprofit organizations to analyze
and select target markets, and then to
develop strategies for gaining and main-
taining these customers. Topics include
competitive strategy, market segmentation,
produrt positioning, business demographics
and marketing-related financial analysis.
Readings, case studies, library assignments
and computer exercises. Prerequisites:
Business 228 and Math 103, or consent of
instructor.

332 ADVERTISING

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of
promotion. Techniques of analysis and con-
trol in the use of advertising and publicity as
tools in developing business strategy. Prere-

quisite: Business 228 or consent of in-
structor.

335 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I

Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature,
sources, and fundamentals of the law in
general, and particularly as relating to con-
tracts, agency, and negotiable instruments.
Open only to juniors and seniors.

336 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II

Lectures on the fundamentals and history of
the law relating to legal association, real
property, wills, and estates. Open only to
juniors and seniors.

338 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I

An introduction to working capital manage-
ment and financial analysis and planning.
Topics are covered through readings, cases
and problen solving in the areas of decisions
on current asset and liability structures, cash
and marketable securities, accounts receiv-
ables, inventory management and control,
spontaneous financing, short-term borrow-
ing, ratio and financial statement analysis,
source and use statements, cash flow fore-
casting, and financial statements forecast-
ing. Prerequisites: Mathenmtics 103: Busi-
ness 110. Ill, and 223: or consent of in-
structor.

339 HNANCLa^L MANAGEMENT II

A study of capital asset structure and long-
term financial decisions. Topics are covered
through readings, cases, and problem solv-
ing in the areas of capital budgeting, includ-
ing risk and required rates of return, leverag-
ing the firm, concepts of capital structures,
dividend policy, external financing, term
and lease financing, long-term debt, equity
securities, convertible securities and war-
rants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or consent
of instructor.

340 INVESTMENTS

An introduction to the financial sector of the
economy and the structure and functions of
financial Vnarkets and the agencies involved;
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the
various types of investments available.
Techniques used to evaluate financial secur-
ities. Also covered are recent developments
in investment theory. Prerequisite: Business
338 or consent of instructor.

439 BUSINESS PRACTICUM

This course provides students with practi-
cal work experience with local companies
and organizations. Students work 10-12
hours per week for their sponsor organi-
zations, in addition to attending a weekly
seminar on management topics relevant to
their work assignments. Since enrollment
is limited by the available number of

Chemistry

positions, students must apply directly to
the business department before preregistra-
tion to be eligible for the course. Majors
only and consent of instructor.

440 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
Structural characteristics and functional rela-
tionships of a business organiztion as well as
the problems encountered in coordinating the
internal resources of a firm. Emphasis on
administrative efficiency and procedures.

441 BUSINESS POLICIES

Planning, organization, and control of
business operations; setting of goals;
coordination of resources, development of
policies. Analysis of strategic decisions
encompassing all areas of a business, and
the use and analysis of control measures.
Emphasis on both the internal relationship
of various elements of production, finance,
marketing, and personnel, and the relation-
ship of the business entity to external
stimuli. Readings, cases, and games.
Prerequisites: Business 223, 228. 329, 338,
339, and 440, or consent of instructor.
Seniors only.

442 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT

An introduction to the managerial problems
of recruiting, selecting, training, and retrain-
ing the human resources of the firm. Emph-
asis is placed on the interrelationship of per-
sonnel policies with management objectives
and philosophies in such areas as fringe be-
nefits, wage and salary policies, union acti-
vities, and health and safety.

443 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I

Planning, organization, and control of the
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop-
ment through store location, layout, admi-
nistration organization, buying, and pricing.
Cases, readings, and papers. Prerequisite:
Business 228 or consent of instructor.

445 MARKETING RESEARCH

This is a study of the principles and practices
of Marketing Research. The focus is on the
development and application of Marketing
Research Studies. Topics covered include
selection of a research design, project plan-
ning and scheduling, data specification and
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze
data, interpretation of data, and research re-
port writing. Readings, cases, and research
project. Mathematics 103 and Business 228
or consent of instructor.

446 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT

An introduction to the planning, organiza-
tion, and controlling of operations in a pro-
duction facility. The course also incorporates
quantitative techniques and computer ap-
plications used in the production and opera-

tions management environment. Topics in-
clude capacity and layout planning, facility
location analysis, job design and work
measurement, production scheduling, mate-
rials requirement planning models, and qual-
ity controls. Students will engage in the
actual design of an inventory status file and
MRP system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or
consent of instructor.

447 CREATIVE ADVERTISING

A workshop concerned with theme, copy,
and effective presentation of advertisements
for print media, radio, and direct mail. Pri-
marily an exploration of creativity through
analysis of works of artists and wnters with
application to practical advertising, and tai-
lored to the interests of individual students.
Ma\ term. Prerequisite: Business 332 or
consent of instructor.

448 SALES SEMINAR

The role of selling in the economy The art of
creative selling; application of theories from
the behavioral sciences to selling through the
analysis of sales situations and techniques.
Prerequisite: Business 228 or consent of in-
structor.

449 MANAGING THE
SMALL BUSINESS

How the potential businessman proceeds in
establishing, operating, and profiting from a
small business operation. Considered and
analyzed are such aspects as marketing,
managing, financing, promoting, insuring,
establishing, developing, and staffing the
small retail, wholesale service, and manu-
facturing firm. May term. Prerequisite:
Business III. 228. and 338 or consent of
instructor. May term.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Typical examples are marketing analysis for
a paper 'products firm, planning a branch
store, hotel and real estate management,
banking and insurance.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Examples of recent studies are: the eco-
nomic impact of a college on a community;
a marketing strategy for a local firm enter-
ing the consumer market.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
A recent project was a study of the evolution
of anti-trust legislation in the United States.

CHEMISTRY

Associate Professor: Franz

(Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Berkheimer,

McDonald
Instructor: Wolfslcill

A major in chemistry consists of Che-
mistry 110-111, 220-221, 330-331, 332
and 333; Physics 225-226; Mathematics
128, 129 and one of the following
courses: Mathematics 103, 231, 238,
332, or Computer Science 125.
Mathematics 231 and 238 and French or
German are strongly recommended for
students planning on graduate study in
chemistry. To be certified in secondary
education, chemistry majors must also
pass two biology courses numbered 1 10
or higher.

A minor in Chemistry requires com-
pletion of four courses numbered 220 or
higher; at least one must be taken from
each of the following groups: Group A
(220-221, 440, 442, 444, 447) and Group
B (226 or 332, 330-331, 333, 439, 443).
Named minors in specialized areas may
be designed by students with depart-
mental approval.

108 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES

An introduction to the principles of inorganic
chemistry. Topics include atomic and
molecular structure, nomenclamre, gases,
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib-
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiomet-
ry. The approach is primarily descriptive,
with illustrations drawn mostly from the
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 115,
this course is designed for those students who
require only two semesters of chemistry, and
is not intended for smdents planning to enroll
in chemistry courses numbered 200 or
above. Three hours lecture, one hour discus-
sion, and one three-hour laboratory period
each week. Prerequisite: high school algeb-
ra or Math 005. Not open for credit to stu-
dents who have received credit for Chemistry
110.

1 10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I

A quantitative introduction to the concepts
and models of chemistry. Topics include
stoichiometry, atomic and molecular struc-
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermoche-
mistry, gases, solutions, and chemical reac-
tions. The laboratory introduces the student
to methods of separation, purification, and

Chemistry

identification of compounds according to
their physical properties. This course is de-
signed for students who plan to major in one
of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one
hour discussion and one three-hour labora-
tory period each week. Prerequisite: place-
ment in Chemistry 1 10 is determined in part
by a student's score on the mathematics
placement examination. Not open for credit
to students who have received credit for Che-
mistry 108. except by permission of the Che-
mistry Department.

1 1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II

A continuation of Chemistry 110. with
emphasis placed on the foundations of analy-
tical, inorganic, and physical chemistry.
Topics include kinetics, general and ionic
equilibria, acid-base theory, electrochemis-
try, thermodynamics, nuclear chemistry,
coordination chemistry, and descriptive in-
organic chemistry of selected elements. The
laboratory treats aspects of quantitative and
qualitative inorganic analysis. Three hours
lecture, one hour discussion, and one three-
hour laboratory period each week. Prere-
quisite: Chemistry 1 10 or consent of the Che-
mistry Department.

1 15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

A descriptive study of the compounds of
carbon. This course will illustrate the princi-
ples of organic chemistry with material re-
levant to students in medical technology,
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the
humanities. Topics include nomenclature,
alkanes, arenes, functional derivatives, ami-
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and
other naturally occurring compounds. This
course is designed for students who require
only one semester of organic chemistry.
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion,
and one four-hour laboratory period each
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108 or 110.
Not open for credit to students who have
received credit for Chemistry 220.

220-221 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

A systematic study of the compounds of car-
bon, including both aliphatic and aromatic
series. The laboratory work introduces the
student to simple fundamental methods of
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis.
Three hours lecture and one four-hour
laboratory period each week. Prerequisite:
Chemistry 111.

lit CLINICAL ANALYSIS

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and
instrumental methods of quantitative analy-
sis with an orientation toward clinical ap-
plications in medical technology. Topics in-
clude: general methods and calculations;

solutions; titrations; photometric analyses
(colorimetric, atomic absorption, flame
emission); electrochemical methods (ion-
selective electrodes, coulometry), automa-
tion. Lec/ure, recitation, and laboratory dai-
l\. Prerequisite: Chemistry 110-111 or con-
sent of instructor . May not be taken for credit
following Chemistry 332. May term only.

330-331 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

A study of the fundamental principles of
theoretical chemistry and their applications.
The laboratory work includes techniques in
physicochemical measurements. Three
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry
HI. Mathematics 129. and one year of phy-
sics or consent of instructor.

332 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

A study of the fundamental methods of gra-
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary in-
strumental analysis together with practice in
laboratory techniques and calculations of
these methods. Two hours lecture and two
three-hour laboratory periods each week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 111 or consent of
instructor.

333 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
A study of modem theories of atomic and
molecular structure and their relationship to
the chemistry of selected elements and their
compounds. Three hours lecture and one
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre-
requisite: Chemistry 330. Mathematics 129.
and one year of physics or consent of in-
structor.

439 INTRODUCTION TO
QUANTUM MECHANICS

After presenting the ongin. basic concepts,
and formulation of quantum mechanics with
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free
panicle, simple harmonic oscillator, and
central-force problems will be investigated.
Both time-independent and time-dependent
perturbation theory will be covered. The ele-
gant operator formalism of quantum mecha-
nics will conclude the course. Four hours of
lecture and recitation. Prerequisites:
Mathematics 231 . either Chemistry 331 or
Physics 226, and consent of instructor.
Cross-listed as Physics 439.

440 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Theory and application of modem synthetic
organic chemistry. Topics may include ox-
idation-reduction processes, carbon-carbon
bond forming reactions, functional group
transformations, and multistep syntheses of
natural products (aniiobiotics, antitumor
agents, and antiviral agents). Three hours
lecture and one four-hour laboratory period.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 .

442 SPECTROSCOPY AND
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE
Theory and application of the identifi-
cation of organic compounds. Special
emphasis will be placed on the utilization
of spectroscopic techniques ('H-NMR,
"C-NMR, IR, UV-VIS, and MS). Three
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory
period each week. Prerequisites: Chemistry
221, Chemistry 331, or consent of in-
structor.

443 ADVANCED
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

A study of advanced analytical methods with
emphasis on chromatographic, electroche-
mical, and spectroscopic methods of in-
stmmental analysis Three hours lecture and
one four-hour laboratory period each week.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and 332 or con-
sent of instructor.

444 BIOCHEMISTRY

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car-
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins,
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism;
and biochemical control mechanisms, in-
cluding allosteric control, induction, repres-
sion, signal transduction as well as the
various types of of inhibitive control
mechanisms. Prerequisite: Chemistry 221
or 115 or consent of instructor. Cross-
listed as Biology 444.

447 POLYMER CHEMISTRY

An introduction to the synthesis, char-
acterization, and applications of high
molecular weight materials, i.e., macro-
molecules. Special emphasis will be given
to synthetic polymer systems. Three hours
lecture, one four-hour tab per week.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 221 and 330, or
consent of instructor.

348 & 448 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM

A seminar in which faculty, students, and
invited professional chemists discuss their
own reseach activities or those of others
which have appeared in recent chemical liter-
ature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of non-
credit Chemistry Colloquium taken during
the junior and senior years.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

The student will ordinarily work under su-
pervision in an industrial laboratory and sub-
mit a written report on the project.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a labora-
tory research project and will write a thesis
on the work.

Criminal Justice

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
The student will ordinarily work on a labora-
tory research project with emphasis being on
the student's showing initiative and making a
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be
written.

CRIMINAL JUSTICE

Assistant Professor: Strauser
(Coordinator)

This major is designed to acquaint
students with the American criminal
justice system and to provide an under-
standing of the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political contexts
within which the system of criminal
justice functions. Its aim is to develop
students' intellectual and scientific skills
in raising and attempting to answer
important questions about the system of
justice and its place in society. The pro-
gram offers opportunity for intern expe-
rience in the field, and prepares for
careers in the areas of law enforcement,
probation and parole, prisons, and treat-
ment services.

The major has two tracks. Track I
prepares for careers in law enforcement.
Track II prepares for careers in correc-
tions.

Track I — Law Enforcement.

The major consists of 10 courses,
distributed as follows:

A. Professional courses in criminal
justice (three courses):
Introduction to the Criminal Justice
System (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 115)

Introduction to Law Enforcement
(Sociology and Anthropology 223)
The American Prison System
(Sociology and Anthropology 339)

B. Courses in the social, psychological,
philosophical, and political context
of the justice system (seven courses):
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 300) and either Juvenile
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro-
pology 334) (two courses)

Abnormal Psychology (Psychology
1 16) (one course)

America as a Civilization (American
Studies 200), Afro- American His-
tory (History 230) or United States
Social and Intellectual History Since
1877 (History 443) (one course)
Law and Society (Political Science
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties
(Political Science 331) (two courses)
Philosophical Issues in Criminal
Justice (Philosophy 218) (one
course)
C. Internship or practicum in law
enforcement. (Recommended but
not required for the major)

Track II — Corrections.

The major consists of 10 courses,
distributed as follows:

A. Professional courses in criminal
justice (three courses):
Introduction to the Criminal Justice
System (Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy 115)

The American Prison System
(Sociology and Anthropology 339)
Introduction to Human Services
(Sociology and Anthropology 222)

C. Internship or practicum in correc-
tions. (Recommended but not
required for the major). Prerequi-
sites: Mathematics 103, Psychology

431. and Psychology 239. These
prerequisites may be waived in cer-
tain cases by the coordinating com-
mittee.

Majors should seek advice con-
cerning course selection from mem-
bers of the coordinating committee
and should note course prerequisites
in planning their programs.

A minor in Criminal Justice con-
sists of five courses. Required
courses include: Soc 115, Introduc-
tion to Criminal Justice; and any four
other courses in the Criminal Justice
major listed above, at least three of
which must be numbered 200 or
above. To receive credit for a minor
in Criminal Justice, a student must
maintain a minimum 2.0 cum in
courses completed for the minor.

ECONOMICS

Professor: Opdahl (Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Madresehee

The major has two tracks. Track I is
designed for the student whose primary
interest lies in business management;
Track II is designed to provide a broad
understanding of economic theory and
its application to economic, social, and
business problems. In addition to pre-
paring students for a career in business
or government, this track provides an
excellent background for graduate or
professional studies.

Track I — Managerial Economics

requires Economics 110, 111, 332, and
either 330 or 441; Business 1 10 and 1 1 1
or Accounting 110 and 220; Business
338 and 339, plus two electives from
Economics 220, 225, 229, 230, 331,
335, 337, 440, 443, and Business 440.
Business 340 (Investments) may be sub-
stituted for Business 339 (Financial
Management II).

Track II — General Economics

requires Economics 110 and 111, 331,
440, 330 or 441, and three other courses
in economics. Depending on their

Economics

academic and career interests, students
are encouraged to select a minor in
another department such as political sci-
ence, philosophy, or history.

In addition, the following courses are
recommended; all majors — Math 103
and Business 223; majors planning gra-
dute work — Math 1 12 and 128; Track

II majors — Business 110 and 1 1 1 or
Accounting 110 and 220.

A minor in Economics requires the
completion of Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1
and three other economics courses num-
bered 200 or above, or any four eco-
nomics courses numbered 200 or above.

1 10 PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS I

Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of
the economic system as a whole. What
influences the level of national income and
employment? What is inflation and why do
we have it? What is the role of government
in a modem capitalistic system? How does
business organize to produce the goods and
services we demand? How are the American
financial and banking systems organized?
What is the nature of American unionism?
What are the elements of government
finance and fiscal policy?

I I I PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS II

This course focuses upon microeconomics
and selected current economic problems It
deals with the relatively small units of the
economy such as the firm and the family.
Analyzes demand and supply. Discusses
how business firms decide what and how
much to produce and how goods and ser-
vices are priced in different types of mark-
ets. Also considers such problems as eco-
nomic growth, international trade, poverty,
discrimination, ecology, and alternative
economic systems.

220 MONEY AND BANKING

Covers business fluctuations and
monetary and fiscal policy; the financial
organization of society; the banking system;
credit institutions; capital markets, and
international financial relations. Prerequi-
site: Economics 110.

221 COMPARATIVE
ECONOMIC SYSTEMS

A comparative analysis of the underlying
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the
performance of selected economic systems.
Alternate years.

224 URBAN PROBLEMS

The application of economic theory to the
study of significant social, political, and

economic problems associated with urbani-
zation, including poverty, employment,
education, crime, health, housing, land use
and the environment, transportation, and
public finance. Analysis of solutions
offered. Alternate years.

225 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS

A smdy of the relationship between environ-
mental decay and economic growth, with
particular reference to failures of the price
and property-rights systems; application of
cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at the
creation of an ecologically viable economy.

226 DEVELOPMENT OF LESS
DEVELOPED COUNTRIES

A study of the theories and problems of
capital accumulation, allocation of
resources, technological development,
growth, planning techniques, and institu-
tions and international relations encountered
by the developing nations. Alternate years.

229 BUSINESS CYCLES
AND FORECASTING

An introduction to the nature and history of
business fluctuations, the tools used in
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to
explain the cycle, and techniques used in
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite:
Economics 110 or permission of the
instructor. Alternate years.

230 ECONOMETRICS

Econometric models provide one of the
most useful and necessary sets of tools
for decision making. By using a variety
of modern statistical methods, econo-
metrics helps us to estimate economic
relationships, test different economic
behaviors, and forecast different economic
variables. Prerequisites: Mathematics 103,
Economics 1 10 and 111, or consent of the
instructor. A llernale years.

330 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary
theory regarding consumer demand, pro-
duction costs and theory, profit maximiza-
tion, market structures, and the determin-
ants of returns to the factors of production.
Prerequisites: Economics 110 and III.
Alternate years.

331 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS
An advanced analysis of contemporary
theory and practice with regard to business
fluctuations, national income accounting,
the determination of income and employ-
ment levels, and the use of monetary and
fiscal policy. Prerequisites: Economics 110
and 111. Alternate years.

332 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY

An analytical survey of government's
efforts to maintain competition through
antitrust legislation; to supervise acceptable
cases of private monopoly through public
utility regulation and via means of regula-
tory commissions, and to encourage or
restrain various types of private economic
activities. Prerequisites: Economics 110
and HI or consent of instructor.

335 LABOR PROBLEMS

The history of organized labor in the United
States, including the structure of unions,
employers' opposition to unions, the role of
government in labor-management relations,
the economic impact of unions. Alternate
years.

337 PUBLIC RNANCE

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the
public sector, including the development,
concepts, and theories of public expendi-
tures, taxation, and debt at all levels of
American government. Includes also the use
of fiscal policy as an economic control
device. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and
111 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.

440 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT
A discussion of the origins, development,
and significance of the economic ideas
embodied in the works of Smith, Marx,
Schumpeter, Keynes, and others. Prerequi-
sites: Economics 110 and 111 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

441 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

The application of economic theory and
methodology to the solution of business
problems. Subjects include: optimizing
techniques, risk analysis, demand theory,
production theory, cost theory, linear pro-
gramming, capital budgeting, market struc-
tures, and the theory of pricing. Prerequi-
sites: Economics 110 and 111. Some
understanding of differential calculus is
recommended.

443 INTERNATIONAL TRADE

A study of the principles, theories, develop-
ment, and policies concerning international
economic relations, with particular refer-
ence to the United States. Subjects covered
include: U.S. commercial policy and its
development, international trade theory,
tariffs and other protectionist devices, inter-
national monetary system and its problems,
balance of payments issues. Alternate
years. Prerequisites: Economics 110 and
111.

Education

AlQ-i^n^ INTERNSHIP (See index)

Typically off campus in business, banking,
or government, supervised by assigned
employee of sponsoring organization.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Superior students may select independent
study in various courses, particularly in pre-
paration for graduate school.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

EDUCATION

Assistant Professors: Conrad

(Chairperson), Hungerford, Powers

Part-time Instructors: Marks, Shivetts
Mosser, Salvatori

The Education Department offers
Pennsylvania approved teacher certifica-
tion programs in elementary and secon-
dary education, as well as a school nurse
certification program.

Students seeking secondary certifica-
tion must complete Education 200 and
Psychology 338, as prerequisites to the
professional semester (Education 446,
447, 449), as well as the necessary sub-
ject area courses. Students may earn
secondary certification in one or more of
the following areas: Art (K-12), biology,
chemistry, English, French, general sci-
ence, German, mathematics, music (K-
12), physics, school nurse (K-12), social
studies, and Spanish.

Students seeking elementary certifica-
tion must complete Education 200,
Psychology 338, Mathematics 105,
Education 000, 341, 342, 343, and 344
as prerequisites to the professional
semester (Education 445, 447 and 448).

Students interested in the teacher-
education program should refer to the
Teacher Education Handbook, which
specifies the current requirements for
certification. Early consultation with a
member of the Education Department is
strongly recommended. Application for
the professional semester must be made
during the fall Semester of the junior

year. The Department of Education
admits to the professional semester only
those applicants who are in good
academic standing, have satisfactorily
completed the participation require-
ments, have paid the student teaching
fee, and have received a positive evalua-
tion based upon: (a) letters from the stu-
dent's major department; (b) letters from
two additional faculty outside the De-
partment of Education: (c) a screening
interview conducted by the Education
Department; and (d) a writing sample
from the student. Major departments
have different criteria for their recom-
mendations. Therefore, the student
should consult with the chairperson of
the major department about those re-
quirements.

(X)0 SEMINAR IN ART, MUSIC, PHYSICAL
EDUCATION

Each elementary student teacher attends a
series of 24 seminars conducted prior to
student teaching, during the Fall Semester
of the senior year. These seminars, con-
ducted by certified public school personnel,
emphasize activities and knowledge which
are helpful in the self-contained elementary
classroom. Non-credit course.

200 INTRODUCTION TO

THE STUDY OF EDUCATION
A study of teaching as a profession with
emphasis on the economic, social, political,
and religious conditions which influence
American schools and teachers. Considera-
tion is given to the school environment, the
curriculum, and the children with the inten-
tion that students will examine more rational-
ly their own motives for entering the profes-
sion.

232 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA
AND COMMUNICATIONS
A study of the value, design, construction,
and application of the visual and auditory
aids to learning. Practical experience in the
handling of audio-visual equipment and
materials is provided. Application of audio-
visual techniques. Application of the visual
and auditory aids to learning. Students will
plan and carry out actual teaching assign-
ments utilizing various A-V devices.

239 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM

An examination of the various curricula of
the public schools and their relationships to
current practices. Special attention will be
given to the meaning and nature of the curri-

culum, the desirable outcomes of the curricu-
lum, conflicting and variant conceptions of
curricular content, modem techniques of
curricular construction, criteria for the eva-
luation of curricula, the curriculum as a
teaching instrument. Emphasis will be
placed upon the curriculum work within the
teaching field of each individual.

341 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Studies and experiences to develop a basic
understanding of the structure, concepts, and
processes of anthropology, economics,
geography, history, political science, and
sociology as they relate to the elementary
school social-science curriculum. Practical
applications, demonstrations of methods,
and the development of integrated teaching
units using tests, reference books, films, and
other teaching materials. Observation and
participation in Lycoming County
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa-
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of
instructor.

342 TEACHING SCIENCE IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
Science methods and materials interpreting
children's science experiences and guiding
the development of their scientific concepts.
A study of the science content of the cumcu-
lum. its material, and use. Observation and
participation in Lycoming County
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa-
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of
instructor.

343 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL.

A course designed to consider the principal
means of communication, oral and written,
including both practical and creative uses.
Attention will be given to listening, speak-
ing, written expression, linguistics and
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of
the language arts. Children's literature will
be explored as a vehicle for developing
creative characteristics in children and for
ensuring an appreciation of the creative
writing of others. Observation and partici-
pation in Lycoming County elementary
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200 and
Psychology 338 or consent of instructor.

344 TEACHING READING IN
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

A basic course in the philosophy and ration-
ale for the implementation of an elementary
developmental-reading program from kin-
dergarten through sixth grade. Emphasis is
upon designing a reading instructional pro-
gram which reflects the nature of the learn-

English

ing process and recognizes principles of
child development through examination of
the principles, problems, methods, and
materials used in elementary reading pro-
grams. Observation and participation in
Lycoming County elementary schools. Pre-
requisites: Psychology 338, Education 200,
or consent of instructor.

The Elementary Professional Semester

The following courses comprise the Elementary
Professional Semester:

Education 445 Methods of Teaching in the
Elementary School

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary
Amencan Education

Education 448 Student Teaching in the
Elementary School

445 METHODS OF TEACHING

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
The course emphasizes the relationship
between the theoretical studies of physical,
social, and cognitive development and the
elementary classroom environment. Parti-
cular consideration will be given to the
appropriate age and developmental level of
the students with an emphasis upon selec-
tion and utilization of methods in all the
elementary subject areas, including art and
music. Specific attention is given to the
development of strategies for structuring
lesson plans, for maintaining classroom
control, and for overall classroom manage-
ment. Direct application is made to the indi-
vidual student-teaching experience. Prereq-
uisites: Mathematics 105, Education 341.
342, 343 and 344, or consent of instructor .

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY
AMERICAN EDUCATION
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal-
lenges encountered by teachers in the
American public schools, especially those
related to the student-teaching experience,

448 STUDENT TEACHING

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Professional experience under the super-
vision of a selected cooperating teacher in
a public elementary school in Lycoming
County. Student teachers are required to
follow the calendar of the school district
to which they are assigned. Two units
maximum.

Students are considered full time when enrolled in
the Professional Semester. Those students needing
an additional course must comply with the stan-
dards stated in the College catalog.

The Secondary Professional Semester

The following courses comprise the Secondary
Professional Semester:

Education 446 Methods of Teaching in the
Secondary School

Education 447 Problems in Contemporary
American Education

Education 449 Student Teaching in the
Secondary School

446 METHODS OF TEACHING

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
A study of materials, methods, and tech-
niques with emphasis on the student's
major. Stress is placed on the selection and
utilization of visual and auditory aids to
learning Students teach demonstration les-
sons in the presence of the instructor and the
members of the class and observe superior
teachers in Lycoming County secondary
schools. Prerequisite: Education 200. Psy-
chology 338, and pre-student teaching par-
ticipation.

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY
AMERICAN EDUCATION
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal-
lenges encountered by teachers in the
Amencan public schools, especially those
related to the student-teaching experience.

449 STUDENT TEACHING IN THE
SECONDARY SCHOOL
(PART OF THE
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER)

Professional laboratory experience under
the supervision of a selected cooperating
teacher in a public secondary school in
Lycoming County. Student teachers are
required to follow the calendar of the
school district to which they are assigned.
Two units maximum.

Students are considered full time when enrolled in
the Professional Semester. Those students needing
an additional course must comply with the stan-
dards stated in the College catalog.

ENGLISH

Professors: Jensen (Chairperson),

Van Marter
Associate Professor: Rife
Assistant Professors: Austin, Bidlake,

Hawkes, Moses
Part-time Instructors: Cronin, Logue

The department offers two programs
leading to the major in English:

Track I - English Major in Literature

This track is designed for students who
choose English as a liberal arts major
that prepares them for a wide range of
career options; for students who choose
English as their subject area for ele-
mentary certification or who wish to earn
secondary certification in English; for
students who wish to improve their
verbal and analytic ability in preparation
for a specific career, such as technical
writing, business, or law; and for stu-
dents who intend to pursue graduate
study in British or American literature.

A minimum of ten courses is required
for Track I. Required courses are English
217, 220, 221, 222, and 223; two courses
selected from English 311, 312, 313, 314,
and 315; one from English 335 and 336;
and two electives from among courses
numbered 215 and above.

Students who wish to earn secondary
certification must complete a minimum
of twelve courses in English. Required
courses in English are 217, 220, 221, 222,
223, 335, 336, and 338; three courses
selected from 311, 312, 313, 314, and
315; and one elective from among courses
numbered 215 and above. Required
courses outside English are Education
200, 446, 447, and 449; Psychology 1 10
and 338; and Theatre 100.

Students who intend to pursue graduate
study in British or American literature
should complete the twelve English courses
specified for secondary certification.

Track II - English Major in Creative
Writing

This track is designed for students who
aspire to careers as professional writers,
as editors, and as publishers; for students
who plan to continue studies in an MFA
or MA program; or for students who
would like to discover their creative
potential while pursuing a fundamental
liberal arts education.

A minimum of eleven courses is re-
quired for Track U. Required courses
are English 225 and 240; three courses
selected from English 220, 221, 222, and
223; one from English 311, 312, 313,

English

314, and 315; one from English 331 and
332; one from English 335 and 336; two
from English 341, 342, 441, and 442
(note prerequisites); and one from English
411 and 412.

The department offers two minors in
English:

Literature: Five courses in literature at
the 200 level or above, at
least three of which must
be numbered 300 or above.
Writing: Four courses chosen from
English 217, 240, 321, 322,
and 338; one writing-inten-
sive course in literature at
the 300 level.

049 DEVELOPMENTAL READING AND
WRITING

Classroom and workshop instruction in
basic reading and writing skills. Emphasis
on reading comprehension, spelling, gram-
mar, and sentence structure; and on orga-
nizing and writing the detailed paragraph
and expository theme. Required study
skills lab offered through Academic
Resource Center.

One unit grade of "P" will be assigned
when the student has successfully com-
pleted all of the work in the course.
Required of, and limited to, those who
have not been exempted from English 049.

106 COMPOSITION

Extensive practice in analytical writing.
Special emphasis on developing the com-
posing skills needed to articulate and
defend a position in various situations
requiring the use of written English.

215 INTRODUCTION TO LITERARY
INTERPRETATION
Practice in the methods of close reading
and formal analysis. Identification of
primary elements and structures of literary
representation. Literature chosen for study
will vary. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor.

217 CRITICAL WRITING SEMINAR

Brief introduction to criticism as a dis-
cipline, followed by workshop training in
writing critical papers on the major literary
genres. Prerequisite: Grade ofC+ or better
in English 106 or consent of instructor.

220 BRITISH LITERATURE I

Literary forms, themes, and authors from
the Anglo-Saxon period through the 18th
century. Emphasis on such writers as
Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton,

Swift, Pope, and Johnson; representative
works from Beowulf {o Burney's Evelina.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor.

221 BRITISH LITERATURE II

Literary movements and authors from the
beginnings of Romanticism to the end of
the 19th century. Particular emphasis on
such writers as Wordsworth, Shelley,
Keats, Tennyson, Browning, Carlyle,
Arnold, Hardy, and Yeats. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.

222 AMERICAN LITERATURE I
Survey of American literature from the
beginning to the Civil War, with major
emphasis on the writers of the Romantic
period: Poe, Emerson, Thoreau, Haw-
thorne, Melville, Dickinson, and Whitman.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor.

223 AMERICAN LITERATURE II
Survey of American literature from the
Civil War to the present, emphasizing such
authors as Twain, James, Crane, Heming-
way, Faulkner, Frost, Eliot, Stevens,
O'Neill, and Williams. Prerequisite: English
106 or consent of instructor.

225 CLASSICAL LITERATURE

A study, in translation, of Greek and
Roman works that have influenced Western
writers. Literary forms studied include
epic, drama, satire, and love poetry.
Writers studied include Homer, Aeschylus,
Sophocles, Euripides, Virgil, Juvenal,
Horace, Lucretius, and Ovid. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.

240 INTRODUCTION TO CREATIVE
WRITING

Workshop discussions, structured exer-
cises, and readings in contemporary lit-
erature to provide practice and basic
instruction in the writing and evaluation
of poetry and fiction. Prerequisite: English
106 or consent of instructor.

311 MEDIEVAL LITERATURE
Readings in Old and Middle English
poetry and prose from Bede's Ecclesiastical
History to Malory's Arthurian romance.
Study of lyric, narrative, drama, and
romance with emphasis on the cultural
context from which these forms emerge.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

312 RENAISSANCE LITERATURE

An examination of themes and literary
forms of the Renaissance. Authors studied
will include Donne, Erasmus, Marlowe,
More, Shakespeare, Skelton, Sidney,

Spenser, and Surrey. Prerequisite: English
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.

3 1 3 RESTORATION AND 1 8th-CENTURY
LITERATURE

Consideration of selected themes, writers,
or modes of Restoration and 18th-century
literature (1660-1800) with emphasis on the
social, political, and intellectual life of that
era. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.

314 ROMANTIC LITERATURE
Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
and themes of the Romantic period (1789-
1832) with emphasis on the social, political,
and intellectual life of that era. Prerequi-
site: English 106 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

315 VICTORIAN LITERATURE
Concentrated study in the writers, texts,
and themes of the Victorian period (1832-
1901) with emphasis on the social, politi-
cal, and intellectual life of that era. Pre-
requisite: English 106 or consent of in-
structor. Alternate years.

321 ADVANCED WRITING: TECHNICAL
AND PROFESSIONAL

A course providing practice in report and
technical writing, proposals, and other
areas where competence will be expected
in the business and scientific worlds.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

322 ADVANCED WRITING: THE
CREATIVE ESSAY

A course in which students from all dis-
ciplines learn to explore and define them-
selves through the essay, a form used to
express the universal through the particular
and the personal. Readings will include
essayists from Montaigne to Gould. Pre-
requisite: Grade of C+ or better in
English 106 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

331 20TH-CENTURY FICTION
Examination of the novels and short
fiction of such major writers as Conrad,
Woolf, Joyce, Faulkner, Fowles, and
Nabokov, with special emphasis on the
relationship of their works to concepts of
modernism. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor.

332 20TH-CENTURY POETRY

Studies in the themes and visions of
modern and contemporary poets including
Yeats, Eliot, Stevens, Frost, Moore,
Lowell, Bishop, and Rich. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.

Foreign Languages
and Literatures

333 THE NOVEL

An examinaiion of British and American
works from the 18th century to the pres-
ent, focusing on the novel's abihty — since
its explosive inception — to redefine its own
boundaries. Prerequisite: English 106 or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.

334 WOMEN AND LITERATURE

An examination — literary, social, and
historical — of selected British and American
literature by women, designed to identify
those elements which distinguish women's
particular contribution to the literary
canon. Prerequisite: English 106 or con-
sent of instructor. A Iternate years.

335 CHAUCER

A study of the major works with emphasis
on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and
Criseyde. Some attention to language
study and to the traditions out of which
Chaucer's works arose. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

336 SHAKESPEARE

A study of representative plays in the
context of Shakespeare's life and times.
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

338 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE
Introduction to methods of analyzing
spoken and written English. Classroom
work supported by weekly tutorials, in
which the student gains practical experience
in identifying, diagnosing, and correcting
basic communications problems. Prerequi-
site: English 106 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

341 POETRY WORKSHOP I

An intermediate workshop focusing on the
writing of poetry and methods of analysis.
Prerequisite: Grade of B or better in
English 240 or consent of instructor.
A Iternate years.

342 FICTION WORKSHOP I

An intermediate course in the writing of
short fiction in a workshop environment,
where the student is trained to hear lan-
guage at work. Emphasis on characteri-
zation and story. Prerequisite: Grade of
B or better in English 240 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

411 FORM AND THEORY; POETRY

Principles of meter, rhythm, rhyme, formal
structure, and traditional and contemporary
poetic forms will be studied through read-

ings, discussion, and exercises. Designed
to enhance skills in both practical criticism
and in creative writing, this course will pay
particular attention to theories concerned
with the relationship between form and
content in poetry. Prerequisite: English
240 or consent of instructor. Alternate
years.

412 FORM AND THEORY: FICTION

.An exploration of such fictional forms as
drama, short story, novella, tale, yarn,
novel, and essay. Serious attention will
be given to aesthetics and the role and
responsibility of the writer in society.
Prerequisite: English 240 or consent of
instructor. A Iternate years.

420 SELECTED WRITERS

."^n intensive study of no more than three
writers, selected on the basis of student
and faculty interest. Possible combinations
include: Frost, Hemingway, and Faulkner;
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser
and Milton; Hawthorne, Melville, and
Dickens; Woolf, Forster, and Lawrence;
Joyce and Yeats. Prerequisite: English 106
or consent of instructor. Alternate years.

421 TOPICS IN LITERATURE
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or
movement as it appears in one or more
types of literature and as it cuts across
various epochs. Possible topics include:
.American Novelists and Poets of the Jazz
Age and Depression; The Bible and Liter-
ature; Gothic Tradition in American
Literature; Mystery and Detective Fiction;
The Hero in Literature. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.
.4 Iternate years.

441 POETRY WORKSHOP II

An advanced workshop in the writing of
poetry. Students will receive intensive
analysis of their own work and acquire
experience in evaluating the work of their
peers. Prerequisite: English 341. Alternate
years.

442 FICTION WORKSHOP II

.\n advanced course in the writing of shon
fiction. Emphasis on the complexities of
voice and tone. The student will be encour-
aged to develop and control his or her
individual style and produce publishable
fiction. Prerequisite: English 342. .Alter-
nate years.

449 ADVANCED CRITICISM

Reading and discussion in the theory and
history of criticism. Examination of both
traditional and contemporary ideas about

the value and nature of literary expression
and its place in human culture generally.
Work in the course includes practical as
well as theoretical use of the ideas and
methods of critical inquiry. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.
A Iternate years.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Department provides internships in editing,
legal work, publishing, and technical
writing.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)
Recent studies include the role of Pennsyl-
vania in the fiction of John O'Hara; the
changing image of women in American art
and literature (1890-1945); the hard-boiled
detective novel; contemporary women
writers; and Milton's use of the Bible in
Paradise Lost.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)
Recent projects include "The Function of
the Past in the Fiction of William Faulkner"
and "Illusion. Order, and Art in the
Novels of Virginia Woolf."

FOREIGN LANGUAGES
AND LITERATURES

Associate Professors: Maples,

MacKenzie (Chairperson)
Assistant Professor: Buedel
Part-time Instructors: Yeager, Lupoid

Study of foreign languages and litera-
tures offers opportunity to explore broad-
ly the varieties of human experience and
thought. It contributes both to personal
and to international understanding by
providing competence in a foreign lan-
guage and a critical acquaintance with
the literature and culture of foreign peo-
ples. A major can serve as entree to
careers in business, industry, govern-
ment, publishing, education, journal-
ism, social agencies, translating, and
writing. It prepares for graduate work in
literature or linguistics and the interna-
tional fields of politics, commerce, law,
health, and area studies.

French, German, and Spanish are
offered as major fields of study. The ma-

Foreign Languages
and Literature

jor consists of at least eight courses num-
bered 1 1 1 or above. Majors seeking
teacher certification and students plan-
ning to enter graduate school are advised
to begin study of a second foreign lan-
guage. The department encourages the
development in breadth of programs, in-
cluding allied courses from related fields
or a second major, and also individual
or established interdisciplinary majors
combining interest in several literatures
or area or cross-cultural studies; for ex-
ample. International Studies, 20th Cen-
tury Studies, the Major in Literature.
Majors, teacher certification candidates,
and all students are encouraged to spend
at least a semester of study abroad by
applying to one of the many programs
available. The department maintains a
file of such programs.

Courses taught in English: Foreign
Languages and Literatures 225 and
French 228 (Section A).

Foreign Languages and Literatures

225 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE

A study of such major continental authors
as Cervantes, Dostoevsky. Chekhov, Dante.
Ibsen. Proust, Gide, Kafka. Hesse, Goethe,
Sartre, Camus, Brecht, and lonesco. Works
read in Enghsh translation will vary and be
organized around a different theme or topic;
recent topics have been existentialism, mod-
ernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 20th
century Scandinavian and German prose
writers. Prerequisile: None. May be repealed
for credit with consent of instructor. May be
accepted toward the English major with
consent of the Department of English.

338 FOREIGN LANGUAGE:
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool
for language learning and teaching. Discus-
sion and application of languge teaching
techniques, including work in the language
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of
one or more languages and normally taken in
the junior year. Students should arrange
through the Department of Education to ful-
fill in the same semester the requirements of
a participation experience in area schools.
Prerequisile: consent of instructor.

French

A major consists of a minimum of
eight courses numbered 111 or above,
including at least two from 402, 412.

423, and 427. In addition, all majors who
wish to be certified for teaching must
pass courses 221-222. and Foreign Lan-
guages and Literatures 338 (the latter
course with a C or better).

A minor in French consists of at least
four courses numbered 221 and above.
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted
toward the minor, but then the minor
must consist of at least five courses, three
of which must be numbered 200 and
above.

101-102 ELEMENTARY FRENCH

The aim of the course is to acquire the fun-
damentals of the language with a view to
using them. Regular practice in speaking,
understanding, and reading.

111-112 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH

Review and development of the fun-
damentals of the language for immediate use
in speaking, understanding, and reading with
a view to building confidence in self-
expression. Prerequisile: French 102 or
equivalent.

221-222 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Further training in speaking, listening com-
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite:
French 112 or equivalent.

228 MODERN FRANCE

A course designed to familiarize students
with political and social structures and cultu-
ral attitudes in contemporary French society.
Materials studied may include such docu-
ments as newspaper articles, interviews and
sociological surveys, and readings in his-
tory, religion, anthropology, and the arts
Some attention to the changing education
system and the family and to events and ideas
which have shaped French society. May in-
clude some comparative study of France and
the United States.

English Section: Not applicable toward
satisfying the foreign language distnbution
requirement Prerequisite: none.

French Section: Offers readings, papers,
and interviews in French for students with
sufficient language skill. Can be applied to-
ward the foreign language distribution re-
quirement. Prerequisite: French 221 or con-
sent of instructor.

402 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800

Major authors and movements from the
Medieval, Renaissance. Classical and En-
lightenment periods. Includes the chanson
de geste, Villon. Montaigne, Corneille.
Racine, Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau.

Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.

412 FRENCH LITERATURE OF
THE I9TH CENTURY
The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility:
Musset. Hugo. Vigny, Balzac, Stendhal
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of
Baudelaire. Rimbaud. Verlaine, and Mal-
larme. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or
consent of instructor. Alternate \ears.

423 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE

Major trends in French drama from the turn
of the century to Existentialism and the
Theatre of the Absurd. Giraudoux, Anouilh,
Sartre, Camus, Beckett. lonesco. Genet.
Adamov, and others. Prerequisite: French
222 or 228 or consent of instructor.

427 FRENCH LITERATURE OF
THE 20TH CENTURY
Representative poets and novelists of mod-
ern France. Readings selected from the
works of authors such as Proust. Gide. Ara-
gon. Giono. Mauriac. Celine, Malraux,
Saint-Exupery. Camus, the "new novelists"
(Robbe-Grillet. Butor, Sarraute. Le Clezio),
and the poetry of Apollinaire, Valery, the
Surrealists (Breton. Reverdy, Eluard, Char),
Saint-John Perse, Supervielle. Prevert. and
others. Some attention to works of French-
speaking African writers. Prerequisite:
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

441 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Intensive practice for advanced students who
wish to improve further their spoken and
written French Includes work in oral com-
prehension, phonetics, pronunciation, oral
and written composition, and translation.
Prerequisite: one course from French 402.
412. 423. 427 or consent of instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Examples of recent studies in French include
translation, existentialism, the classical
period, enlightenment literature, and Saint-
Exupery.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

German

A major consists of a minimum of
eight courses numbered 1 1 1 or above.
One unit of Foreign Languages and
Literatures 225 may be included in the

Foreign Languages
and Literature

major with permission. German 431 or
German 441 is required of all majors.

All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching must pass German 323 and 325.
In addition to the eight courses for the
major they must also pass Foreign Lan-
guages and Literatures 338 with a grade
of C or better. All majors are urged to
enroll in History 416, Music 336, Poli-
tical Science 220 and Theatre 335.

A minor in German consists of at least
four courses numbered 200 and above.
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted
toward the minor, but then the minor
must consist of at least five courses, three
of which must be numbered 200 and
above.

1 0 1 - 1 02 ELEMENTARY GERMAN

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals
of the language with a view to using them.
Regular practice in speaking, understanding,
and reading.

111-112 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN

Review and development of fundamentals of
the language for immediate use in speaking,
understanding, and reading with a view to
building confidence in self-expression. Pre-
requisite: German 102 or equivalent.

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND
LANGUAGE PRACTICE
A two-semester course designed to review
and develop skills in speaking, listening,
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabul-
ary building are stressed with intensive re-
view, writing practice and some reading on
contemporary issues in German-speaking
countries. As the course progresses, greater
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening
comprehension, and translation. Some atten-
tion is given to the development of the lan-
guage and its relationship to English. Prere-
quisite: German 112 or equivalent.

323 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE
AND CIVILIZATION I
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of German literature, representa-
tive authors, and major cultural develop-
ments in Germany, Austria, and Switzer-
land. The-course deals with literature and
culture from the Early Middle Ages through
the 18th century. Prerequisite: German 222
or consent of instructor.

325 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE
AND CIVILIZATION II
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of German literature, representa-
tive authors, and major cultural develop-

ments in Germany. Austria, and Switzer-
land. The course deals with literature and
culture from the 19th century to the present.
Prerequisite: German 222 or consent of in-
structor.

4 1 1 THE NOVELLE

The German Novelle as a genre relating to
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger-
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor.

421 GERMAN POETRY

A study of selected poets or the poetry of
various literary periods. Possible topics in-
clude: Romantic poetry. Heine. Rilke. and
Benn . Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or
consent of instructor.

431 GOETHE

A study of the life and works of Goethe.
Goethe's significance in the Classical penod
and later. Readings in the major works. Pre-
requisite: German 323 or 325 or consent of
instructor.

433 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA

The development of das klassische Drama
with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe.
Kleist. and Schiller. Prerequisite: German
323 or 325 or consent of instructor.

441 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN
LITERATURE

Representative poets, novelists and dramat-
ists of contemporary Germany. Switzerland
and Austna covering the period from 1 945 to
the present. Readings selected from writers
sucli as: Borchert, Boll. Brecht. Benn.
Frisch, Diirrenmatt. Bichsel. Handke,
Walser, Grass and others. Prerequisite: Ger-
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index)

Examples of recent studies in German in-
clude Classicism. Germanic Mythology,
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Fnsch, and
Diirrenmatt.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

Greek

Greek is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan-
guages requires the completion of Greek
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222.

101-102 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR
AND READINGS
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek

grammar and readings of selected passages
of the Greek text. Alternate years.

221 READINGS IN THE
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS

A comparative study of the synoptic tradition
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102 or equiva-
lent. Alternate years.

222 READINGS IN THE
PAULINE EPISTLES

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva-
lent. Alternate years.

Hebrew

Hebrew is not offered as a major. An
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan-
guages requires the completion of Greek
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222.

101-102 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR
AND READINGS
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew
grammar and readings of selected passages
of the Hebrew text. Alternate years.

221 READINGS IN OLD
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa-
ment with special attention being given to
exegetical questions. The text read varies
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102
or equivalent. Alternate years.

222 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE
A critical reading of the Hebrew text of
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy
and wisdom literature with special attention
being given to exegetical questions. The text
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite:
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. Alternate years.

Spanish

A major consists of eight courses num-
bered 1 1 1 or above. Foreign Languages
and Literatures 338 does not count to-
ward the major.

All majors who wish to be certified for
teaching in secondary school must pass
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 418.

A minor in Spanish consists of at least
four courses numbered 200 and above.
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 may be counted
toward the minor, but then the minor
must consist of at least five courses , three
of which must be numbered 200 and
above.

History

101-102 ELEMENTARY SPANISH

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals
of the language with a view to using them.
Regular practice in speaking, understanding,
and readmg.

111-112 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH

Review and development of fundamentals of
the language for immediate use in speaking,
understanding, reading and writing with a
view to building confidence in self-
expression. Usually the student chooses
from among the following areas for their
work in building vocabulary and fluency:
Spanish for Business and Economics. Span-
ish for Social Services. Spanish for Law En-
forcement. Spanish for Health Care Profes-
sionals, or. for the student who does not plan
to use the language for one of these specific
career goals. Spanish for Communication.
Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equivalent.

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND
LANGUAGE PRACTICE
This course consists of a thorough review of
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and
expression, discussion of readings and the
writing of compositions. It is designed to
develop the student's ability to read, write
and converse in Spanish with confidence.
Prerequisite: Spanish 112 or equivalent.

311 HISPANIC CULTURE

To introduce students to the Spanish-
speaking people — their values, customs and
institutions, with reference to the geographic
and historical forces governing present-day
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite:
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor . Alter-
nate years.

323 SURVEY OF SPANISH

LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of Spanish literature, representa-
tive authors, and major socio-economic de-
velopments. The course deals with the litera-
ture from the beginning to the present. Prere-
quisite: Spanish 222 or consent of instructor .
Alternate years.

325 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION
Designed to acquaint the student with impor-
tant periods of Spanish-American literature,
representative authors, and major socio-
economic developments. The course deals
with the literature, especially the essay and
poetry, from the 1 6th century to the present.
Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or consent of in-
structor. Alternate years.

418 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE
Intensive practice for advanced students who
wish to improve further their spoken and

written Spanish. Includes work in oral com-
prehension, pronunciation, oral and written
composition, and translation. Prerequisite:
One Spanish course at the iOO' s level or
consent of instructor. Alternate years.

424 SPANISH LITERATURE OF
THE GOLDEN AGE

A study of representative works and princip-
al literary figures in the poetry, prose, and
drama of the 16th and 17th centunes Prere-
quisite: Spanish 323. 325. or consent of in-
structor.

426 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE

Readings of important works of drama, poet-
ry, and prose from the major periods of 19th
and 20th century Spanish and Latin-
Amencan literature. Prerequisite: Spanish
323, 325. or consent of instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY

(See index)
Recent studies include literary, linguistic,
and culmral topics and themes such as urban
problems as reflected in the modem novel.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

HISTORY

Professors: Larson, Piper (Chairperson)
Associate Professor; Morris

A major consists of 10 courses, in-
cluding 110, 111, and 449. At least
seven courses must be taken in the de-
partment. The following courses may be
counted toward fulfilling the major re-
quirements: American Studies 200, Poli-
tical Science 439, Religion 226 and 228.
Other appropriate courses outside the de-
partment may be counted upon depart-
mental approval. For history majors who
student teach in history, the major con-
sists of nine courses. In addition to the
courses listed below, special courses, in-
dependent study, and honors are avail-
able. Special courses recently taught and
anticipated include a biographical study
of European Monarchs, the European
Left, the Industrialization and Urbaniza-
tion of Modem Europe, Utopian Move-
ments in America, the Peace Movement
in America, The Vietnam War, and

American Legal History. History majors
are encouraged to participate in the in-
ternship program.

Three minors are offered by the De-
partment of History. The following
courses are required to complete a minor
in American History: History 125, 126,
and three courses in American history
numbered 200 and above. A minor in
European History requires the comple-
tion of History 110, 111, and three
courses in European history numbered
200 and above. To obtain a minor in
History (without national or geographic
designation), a student must complete
six courses in history, of which three
must be chosen from History 1 10, 111,
125 and 126 and three must be history
courses numbered 200 and above.

105 SELECTED THEMES IN
WESTERN CIVILIZATION

A survey of the political, economic, social,
and cultural values and institutions in West-
em Civilization from the time of classical
Greece to the present. One-half tinit of cre-
dit. (Not open to students who have had His-
tory no and 111).

110 EUROPE 1500-1815

An examination of the political, social,
cultural, and intellecmal history of Europe
and its relations with other areas of the world
from 1500 to 1815.

111 EUROPE 1 815-Present

An examination of the political, social,
cultural, and intellectual history of Europe
and its relations with other areas of the world
from 1815 to the present.

120 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY

An examination of the native civilization , the
age of discovery and conquest, Spanish colo-
nial policy, the independence movements,
and the development of modem institutions
and governments in Latin America. Alter-
nate years.

125 UNTTED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877
A study of the men. measures, and move-
ments which have been significant in the
development of the United States between
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the prob-
lems of minority groups as well as to major-
ity and national influences.

126 UNITED STATES HISTORY

1877-Present

A study of men, measures, and movements

which have been significant in the develop-

International Studies

antecedents through reconstruction. Among
the topics considered are Puritanism, trans-
cendentalism, community life and organiza-
tion, education, and social-reform move-
ments. Prerequisiles: tH'o courses from His-
tory- 125. 126. 230, or consent of instructor

443 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877
A study of the social and intellectual experi-
ence of the United States from reconstruction
to the present day. Among the topics consi-
dered are social Darwinism, pragmatism,
community life and organization, education
and social reform movements. Prere-
quisites: two courses from History 125. 126.
230. or consent of instructor.

449 HISTORICAL METHODS

This course focuses on the nature and mean-
ing of history. It will open to the student
different historical approaches and will pro-
vide the opportunity to explore these
approaches in terms of particular topics and
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this
course in either their junior or senior year.
The course is open to other students who
have two courses in history or consent of
instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Typically, history interns work for local gov-
ernment agencies engaged in historical pro-
jects or for the Lycoming County Historical
Museum.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY

(See index)
Recent topics include studies of the immigra-
tion of American blacks, political dissension
in the Weimer Republic, Indian relations be-
fore the American Revolution, and the his-
tory of Lycoming County.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

INTERNATIONAL STUDIES

Professor: Larson
(Coordinator)

The major is designed to integrate an
understanding of the changing sociaK
politicaK and historical environment of
Europe today with study of Europe in its
relations to the rest of the world, particu-
larly the United States, It stresses the
international relations of the North

Atlantic community and offers the stu-
dent opportunity to emphasize either
European studies or international rela-
tions. The program provides multiple
perspectives on the cultural traits that
shape popular attitudes and institutions.
Study of a single country is included as a
data-base for comparisons, and study of
its language, as a basis for direct com-
munication with its people.

The program is intended to prepare a
student either for graduate study or for
careers which have an international com-
ponent. International obligations are in-
creasingly assumed by government
agencies and a wide range of business,
social, religious, and educational orga-
nizations. Opportunities are found in the
fields of journalism, publishing, com-
munications, trade, banking, advertis-
ing, management, and tourism. The
program also offers flexible career pre-
paration in a variety of essential skills,
such as research, data analysis, report
writing, languge skills, and the aware-
ness necessary for dealing with people
and institutions of another culture. Pre-
paration for related careers can be
obtained through the guided selection of
courses outside the major in the areas of
business, economics, foreign languages
and literatures, government, history, and
international relations or through a
second major. Students should design
their programs in consultation with
members of the Committee on Interna-
tional Studies,

By completing six to eight additional
courses in the social sciences (which in-
clude those courses needed to complete a
major in economics, history, political
science, or sociology/anthropology) and
the required program in eduction, stu-
dents can be certified for the teacher
education program in social studies. By
completing a major in the foreign lan-
guage (five or more courses) and the
education program, students can be certi-
fied to teach that language. The Interna-
tional Studies program also encourages
participation in study-abroad programs,
as well as the Washington and United
Nations semesters.

The major includes 1 1 courses
selected as follows:

International Relations Courses —

Four or two courses (if two, then four
must be taken from Area Courses),
Courses within this group are designed to
provide a basic understanding of the in-
ternational system and of Europe's rela-
tions with the rest of the world. Political
Science 225 is required.

Political Science 225: Worid Politics
Economics 443: International Trade
History 320: European Diplomatic History
Political Science 439: American Foreign
Policy

Area Courses — Four or two courses (if
two, then four must be taken from Inter-
national Relations Courses), Courses
within this group are designed to provide
a basic understanding of the European
political, social, and economic environ-
ment. History 111 and Economics 221
are required.

History III: Europe 1815-Present
Economics 221: Comparative Economic

Systems
Political Science 220: European Politics
History 218: Europe in the Era of the

World Wars
History 219: Contemporary Europe

National Courses

Language — Two courses in one lan-
guage,

French 221, plus one course numbered 222 or

above (except 228)

German 221, plus one course numbered 222 or

above

Spanish 221, plus one course numbered 222 or

above (except 311)

Country — One course. The student
must select, according to his or her lan-
guage preparation, one European coun-
try which will serve as a special interest
area throughout the program. The coun-
try selected will serve as the base for
individual projects in the major courses
wherever possible.

France — French 228: Modem France
Germany — History N80: Topics in German

History
Spain — Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture

History

ment of the United States since 1877. Atten-
tion is paid to the problems of minority
groups as well as to majority and national
influences.

210 ANCIENT HISTORY

A study of the ancient western world, includ-
ing the foundations of the western tradition in
Greece, the emergence and expansion of the
Roman state, its experience as a republic,
and its transformation into the Empire, The
course will focus on the social and intellec-
tual life of Greece and Rome as well as poli-
tical and economic changes. ,4//ernatfyear5.

212 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND
ITS NEIGHBORS

The history of Europe from the dissolution of
the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th century.
The course will deal with the growing
estrangement of western Catholic Europe
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic
Empire and its later fragmentation; the de-
velopment and growth of feudalism; the con-
flict of empire and papacy, and the rise of the
towns. Alternate years.

216 FRENCH REVOLUTION
AND NAPOLEON

An analysis of the political, social, and intel-
lectual background of the French Revolu-
tion, a survey of the course of revolutionary
development, and an estimate of the results
of the Napoleonic conquests and administra-
tion. Prerequisite: History 110 or consent of
instructor. Alternate years.

218 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF
THE WORLD WARS

An intensive study of the political, econo-
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe
from 1900-1945. Topics include the nse of
irrationalism, the origins of the First World
War, the Communist and Fascist Revolu-
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace
before 1939. Prerequisite: History 1 1 1 or
consent of instructor.

219 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE

An intensive study of the political, econo-
mic, social, and cultural history of Europe
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco-
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold
War, decolonization, and the flowering of
the welfare state. Prerequisite: History 111
or consent of instructor.

Ill HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II

A comprehensive examination of World War
II emphasizing the effect of ideological , eco-
nomic, and political forces on the formula-
tion of military strategy and the conduct of
operation; the nature and extent of the expan-

sion of government powers; and the experi-
ence of war from the perspective of ordinary
civilians and military alike. Does not count
toward distribution.

126 COLONIAL AMERICA AND
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA
The establishment of British settlements on
the American continent, their history as col-
onies, the causes and events of the American
Revolution, the critical period following in-
dependence, and proposal and adoption of
the United States Constitution. Alternate
years.

230 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY

A study of the experiences and participation
of Afro-Americans in the United States. The
course includes historical experiences such
as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the
development and growth of white racism,
and the effect of this racism on contemporary
Afro-American social, intellectual, and poli-
tical life. Alternate years.

244 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES

This course begins with the Progressive Era
and includes the political, economic, and
social developments in the 20th century
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and
international demands which have faced the
United States in the penod following World
War II.

310 WOMEN IN HISTORY

An examination of the social, political, eco-
nomic and intellectual experience of women
in the Western World from ancient times to
the present. May be taken for either one-half
unit (section 3I0A) or full unit {section
3I0B); declared majors and prospective ma-
jors should take the full-unit course, 310B.

316 CONFLICT IN

WESTERN CIVILIZATION
An in-depth study of the changing nature of
war and its relationship to the development
of Western Civilization since the end of the
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be
placed on the role of war in the development
of the modem nation state and the origins and
nature of total war. Alternate years.

320 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF
EUROPE SINCE 1789
A survey of the development of the Euro-
pean-states system and the relations between
the European states since the beginning of
the French Revolution . Prerequisite: History
111 or consent of instructor. Alternate years.

322 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND
NATIONALISM, EUROPE 1848-1870
An in-depth investigation of the crucial

"Middle Years" of 1 9th century Europe from
the revolutions of 1848 through the unifica-
tion of Germany. The course centers on the
struggles for power within the major states of
Europe at this time, and how the vehicle of
nationalism was used to bring about one type
of solution. Alternate years.

328 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON
The theme of the course is the emergence of
the political and social characteristics that
shaped modem America. The personalities
of Thomas Jefferson. John Marshall. John
Randolph. Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson
receive special attention. Special considera-
tion is given to the first and second party
systems, the decline in community cohesive-
ness. the westward movement, and the grow-
ing importance of the family as a unit of
social organization. Alternate years.

332 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION
The problems and events leading to war, the
political and military history of the war, and
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of
1877.

340 20TH CENTURY

UNITED STATES RELIGION
The study of historical and cultural develop-
ments in American society which relate to
religion or what is commonly called religion.
This involves consideration of the institu-
tional and intellectual development of sever-
al faith groups as well as discussion of certain
problems, such as the persistence of religious
bigotry and the changing modes of church-
slate relationships. Alternate years.

416 HISTORY OF

REFORMATION THOUGHT

A study of the ideas and systems of ideas
propounded prior to the Reformation, but
which are historically related to its inception,
and of the ideas and systems of ideas in-
volved in the formulation of the major Re-
formation Protestant traditions, and in the
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas
of the humanists of the Reformation Era.
Alternate years.

418 HISTORY OF

RENAISSANCE THOUGHT
A study of the classical, humanist, and scho-
lastic elements involved in the development
of the Renaissance outlook on views and
values, both in Italy and in Northem Europe.
The various combinations of social and poli-
tical circumstances which constitute the his-
torical context of these intellectual develop-
ments will be noted. Alternate years.

442 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND

INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877
A study of the social and intellectual experi-
ence of the United States from its colonial

Mass Communication

Elective Course — One course which
should involve further study of some
aspect of the program. Appropriate
courses are any area or international rela-
tions courses not yet taken. History 1 10,
316; Economics 226; Political Science
326, 327, 438; related foreign-literature
courses counting toward the fine-arts re-
quirement and internships.

Senior Seminar

449 SENIOR SEMINAR

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior
year, in which students and several faculty
members will pursue an integrative topic in
the field of international studies. Students
will work 10 some extent independently.
Guest speakers will be invited. The seminar
will be open to qualified persons from out-
side the major and the College. Prerequisite :
consent of instructor.

LITERATURE

Associate Professor: Maples
(Coordinator)

This major recognizes literature as a
distinct discipline beyond national
boundaries and combines the study of
any two literatures in the areas of En-
glish, French, German, and Spanish.
Students can thus explore two literatures
widely and intensively at the upper levels
of course offerings within each of the
respective departments while developing
and applying skills in foreign languages.
The major prepares students for graduate
study in either of the two literatures stu-
died or in comparative literature.

The major requires at least six litera-
ture courses, equally divided between
the two literatures concerned. The six
must be at the advanced level as deter-
mined in consultation with advisors (nor-
mally courses numbered 200 and above
in English and 400 and above in foreign
languges). In general, two of the adv-
anced courses in each literature should be
period courses. The third course, taken
either as a regular course or an indepen-
dent study, may have as its subject
another period, a particular author.

genre, or literary theme, or some other
unifying approach or idea. Beyond these
six, the major must include at least two
additional courses from among those
counting toward a major in the depart-
ments involved. Any prerequisite
courses in the respective departments
(for example: English 106, French 221-
222 or 228, German 221-222, Spanish
221-222) should be taken during the
freshman year. Students should design
their programs in consultation with a
faculty member from each of the litera-
tures concerned. Programs for the major
must be approved by the departments
involved.

MASS COMMUNICATION

Assistant Professors: Nason
(Chairperson), Smith, Wild

The major in Mass Communication
recognizes the need for a liberal arts
foundation and includes selected courses
from the Departments of Art, Business
Administration, History, Philosophy,
Political Science, Psychology and Soci-
ology/Anthropology. The major combines
a core of Mass Communication courses
with one of three professional tracks:
Advertising/Public Relations, Broadcast
Journalism, and Journalism. Emphasis
is placed on developing an understanding
of the cultural and historical roles of
the mass media and on developing the
communicative skills necessary for careers
in the media.

Students majoring in Mass Com-
munication must complete the Core Cur-
riculum and one professional track. Each
track requires a combination of theory,
production, and writing courses.

A minor in Mass Communication
consists of Mass Communication 110,
211, 215, and three of the following
courses: Mass Communication 224, 329,
330, 331, 470.

I. THE CORE CURRICULUM

REQUIRED OF ALL STUDENTS
Mass Comm 215 Introduction to

Media Writing

Mas^ Comm 1 10

Mass Comm 2 1 1

Mass Comm .''30

Mass Comm ."1.11

Pol Sci 448

Mass Comm 247.
lone credit each)

Introduction to

Mass Communication

Fundamentals ol

Oral Communication

Theories and Issues

in Mass Communication

Mass Media Law

and Regulation

Public Opinion

and Polling'

248. 244 Praclicum in

Mass Communication

*Business445 (Marketing Research), Psychol-
ogy 224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be sub-
stituted. These courses require departmental
prerequisites or consent of individual instruc-
tors.

Students must complete the require-
ments of one of the following profession-
al tracks:

Track I — Advertising/Public Relations

Business 228 Marketing Management I

Business 332 Advertising

Mass Comm 325 Writing for

Business and

Public Relations

One of the following writing courses:
Mass Comm 323 Writing for

Special Audiences
Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism

Two of the following production courses:
Art 227 Introduction to Photography

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming

and Production
Mass Comm 224 Television Production

Track II — Journalism

Art 227 Introduction to Photography

Mass Comm 327 Print Journalism

Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government

One of the following additional writing
courses:

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journahsm

Mass Comm 334 Public Affairs

Reporting

One of the following courses:
History 126 United States History.

1877-present
Philosophy 115 Philosophy and

Public Policy
Sociology 227 Social Problems*

Sociology 334 Racial and

Cultural Minorities*
•Requires prerequisite or consent of in-
structor

Mathematical Science

Track III — Broadcast Journalism

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programing

and Production
Mass Comm 224 Television Production
Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Production
Mass Comm 334 Public Affairs Reporting
Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government

One of the following courses:
History 126 United States History,

1877-present
Philosophy 1 15 Philosophy and

Public Policy
Sociology 227 Social Problems*

Sociology 334 Racial and

Cultural Minorities*
'Requires a prerequisite or consent ot in-
structor

110 INTRODUCTION TO

MASS COMMUNICATION
Theories of the process of mass communica-
tion and introduction to the mass media;
attention will be given to problems of cen-
sorship and media ethics. Analysis of the
mass media's impact on society; emphasis
will be placed on the social, psychological,
and political implications of the media's
shaping influence on man and institutions,

2 1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF

ORAL COMMUNICATION
The dynamics of oral communication. The
development of elementary principles of
simple oral communication through lectures,
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor-
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape
sequences for feedback to students.

215 1 NTRODUCTION TO MEDIA
WRITING

Analysis of and practice in the basic fomis of
media writing: the elements of lead, style and
structure. Frequent workshop sessions for
detailed critiques and discussion of student
writing. PrerequisUes: A grade ofC or belter
in Eni>lish 106 or eonseni of I he inslnicror.

218 RADIO PROGRAMMING
AND PRODUCTION
Contemporary broadcast programming tech-
niques including station scheduling, prog-
ram development and analysis, and imple-
mentation in real and hypothetical situations.
Emphasis on management functions.

224 TELEVISION PRODUCTION

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and
business aspects ol video programs. Study
and use of basic equipment to produce stan-
dard formats on videotape.

226 LITERATURE, FILM AND TELEVISION
The relationship between the conventions
of literature, film and television with
emphasis on examination of representative
works. Media comparison to reveal the

problems of adaptation. Prerequisite:
English 106 or consent of instructor.

247:49 PRACTICUM IN

MASS COMMUNICATION
Utilization of mass communication princi-
ples, techniques and skills in an applied
setting through work experience, primarily
with campus media. Students will write,
produce and report news for print (Mass
Comm 247), radio (Mass Comm 248) and
television (Mass Comm 249) outlets. One-
hour credit. P/F grade. One may be
repeated once for credit. Limit of one hour
credit per semester. Prerequisite: Consent
of the instructor.

323 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES
Intensive practice in writing with a purpose
and in presenting information related to
the student's interests to different kinds of
audiences. Includes training in the use of
graphics and in library research applicable
to defined topics and audiences. Designed
for Mass Communication students but
open to others. Prerequisite: a grade ofC
or better in Mass Communication 215 or
consent of instructor.

325 WRITING FOR BUSINESS AND
PUBLIC RELATIONS
Analyzing media and audiences for public
relations and business purposes; planning,
designing, and writing business reports and
procedures; press relations and publicity
methods; the news feature and publicity
release. Includes training in library research
related to business communications and
public relations. Prerequisite: a grade of
C or belter in Mass Communication 215
or consent of instructor.

327 PRINT JOURNALISM

Techniques in reporting news and trends at
ihe local, regional, and county levels;
emphasis on writing the longer news and
lealure anicle. the editorial, and the investi-
gative news story. PrereciKisiic: A finule a/
C or lu'ller in Muss Coinmiinualum 215 or
Kniseiil of the inslruclor.

329 BROADCAST JOURNALISM

Study of, and practical experience in, the
newsgathering process for electronic media.
Emphasis on covering the local story from
the small-station perspective. Students in
the course are responsible for writing, pro-
ducing, editing and broadcasting newscasts
for WRLC-FM. The course also looks at
the special ethical problems of electronic
news coverage. Prerequisites: Mass Com-
munication 215 and Mass Communication
218 or consent of instructor.

}.M) THEORIES AND ISSUES IN
MASS COMMUNICATION

An analysis of current theories dealing with

mass communication systems and the
behavior and attitudes of, and effects on,
their audiences. The course also examines
contemporary mass media issues with an
emphasis on developing critical thinking
skills. Prerequisites: Mass Communication

no.

331 MASS MEDIA LAW
AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and
Ihe system by which mass communication is
controlled in this society. The forces which
shape, inlluence. and make policy will be
considered. Cross-liMeil as Political Sci-
ciHC 4.^f>. Prerecjiiisile: junior <n- .senior
slanilinii or t<nisenl of nmniilor.

334 PUBLIC AFFAIRS REPORTING

A workshop course in the reporting of
public affairs at the local level. The course
will investigate the relationship between
journalists and government through
reporting assignments at local munici-
palities. Prerequisite: a grade of C or
better in Mass Communication 215 or
consent of instructor.

470-474 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Inlcrnv usually work off campus in a field
related to their communication sequence.
Prerecjiiisile: Four semesters of Mass Coin-
iniinuoiion Praelieiim or consent of the
nwirm lor.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See Index)
Sludies involve research related to the com-
municalion sequence ol the student

4411-441 INDEPENDENT .STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES

Associate Professors: Haley,

(Chairperson), Sprechini
Assistant Professors: Bucki, deSilva,

Golshan, Weida, Yan
Part-time Instructor: Davis

The Department of Mathematical Sci-
ences offers major programs in computer
science and mathematics.

Computer Science

A major in computer science consists
of 11 courses: Mathematics 116, 128,

Mathematical Science

and 129, and Computer Science 125,
246. 247, 321, 344, 445, and two other
computer science courses numbered 320
or above. Recommended extradepart-
mental courses: Physics 229, Philosophy
225, and Psychology 337. In addition to
the regular courses listed below, special
courses are occasionally available.

A minor in computer science consists
of Math 116, Computer Science 125,
246, 247, and two other computer
science courses numbered 220 or above.

108 MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM SOLVING
WITH MICROCOMPUTERS
An introduction to the use of microcomputer-
based, integrated software in solving prob-
lems from mathematics and related areas.
Included are uses of spreadsheet, data-base
and graphics functions to analyze, solve, and
display solutions to problems from the areas
of number theory, algebra, geometry, statis-
tics, and the mathematics of business and
finance. Emphasis is given to the processes
involved in mathematical modeling. Labora-
tory experience is included using current
software. Prerequisile: Credit fnr or exemp-
tion from Mathematics 005.

125 INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER SCIENCE
Introduction to programming. Topics
include algorithms, program structure,
and computer configuration. Laboratory
experience is included, most recently using
Pascal and the Karel simulation package.
Prerequisite: credit for or exemption from
Mathematics 005.

246 PRINCIPLES OF

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING

Principles of effective programming, in-
cluding structured programming, stepwise
refinement, assenion proving, style, debug-
ging, control structure, decision tables,
finite state machines, recursion, and en-
coding. Utilities most recently used include
SVS Pascal, the UNIX operating system
C, and Shell programming. Prerequisite:
A grade of C or better in Computer
Science 125 or consent of instructor.

247 DATA STRUCTURES

Representation of data and algorithms
associated with data structures. Topics in-
clude representation of lists, trees, graphs
and strings, algorithms for searching and
sorting. Prerequisite: A grade of C or
belter in Computer Science 246 or consent
of instructor. Corequisite: Mathematics
116.

32 1 INTRODUCTION TO

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Topics from the theory of interpolation;
numerical approaches to approximating
roots and functions, integration, systems of
differential equations, linear systems, ma-
trix inversion, and the eigenvalue prob-
lem. Prerequisite: Computer Science 125
and Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130
strongly recommended.

344 MACHINE LANGUAGE

Principles of machine language program-
ming; computer organization and representa-
tion of numbers, strings, arrays, and list
structures at the machine level; interrupt
programming, relocatable code, linking
loaders; interfacing with operating systems
Prerequisile: a grade ofC or belter in Com-
puter Science 246 or consent of instructor.

345 INTRODUCTION TO
COMPUTER GRAPHICS

An introduction to graphics hardware and
software with emphasis on the mathematics
necessary to represent, transform, and dis-
play images of two and three dimensional
objects. Laboratory exercises will be de-
signed to explore the capabilities of the
graphics system and to test the students'
understanding of the principles discussed in
class. Prerequisite: Computer Science 246
and either Computer Science 24 7 or permis-
sion of the instructor: Mathematics ISO re-
commended. Alternate years.

,349 DATABASE SYSTEMS

External storage structures, hashed files, in-
dexed files; relational, network, and hierar-
chical data models; relational algebra and the
relational calculus; design theory for re-
lational databases; query optimization; con-
current operations; database protection. Pre-
requisite: Computer Science 247. Alternate
years.

445 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING

The emphasis in this course is on the algor-
ithms used in programming the various parts
of a computer system. These parts include
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt pro-
cessors, input/output schedulers, processor
and job schedulers, and memory managers.
Prerequisile: Computer Science 247 and
344.

446 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION

The emphasis in this course is on the con-
struction of translators for programming lan-
guages. Topics include lexical analysis,
block structure, grammars, parsing, program
representation, and run-time organization.
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. Alter-
nate vears.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY

(See index)

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

Mathematics

A major in mathematics consists of 10
unit courses in the mathematical sciences
and four semesters of non-credit col-
loquial Computer Science 125, Mathe-
matics 128, 129, 130, 234, 238, 432,
434, and two other mathematics courses
numbered 220 or above, one of which
may be replaced by Mathematics 112,
116, or 214; four semesters of Mathe-
matics 339 or 449 taken during the junior
and senior years.

Majors are required to attend the
colloquia during their junior and senior
years (339 and 449 respectively). See
the course description of Mathematics
339-449 for further information regard-
ing the colloquium requirement.

Students seeking secondary certifica-
tion in mathematics are required to com-
plete Mathematics 330 and 336 and are
advised to enroll in Philosophy 217.
Also, all majors are advised to elect Phi-
losophy 225 and 333, Physics 225 and
226.

In addition to the regular courses listed
below, special courses are occasionally
available.

A minor in Mathematics consists of
Mathematics 128, 129, 234, 238, and two
additional courses numbered 130 or
above.

005 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal
numerals, fractions, the real number line,
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic
functions, expressions with rational expo-
nents, algebraic functions, exponential func-
tions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE IS
LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS DE-
PARTMENT. One-half unit of credit.

103 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS
Topics include tabular and graphical
descriptive statistics, discrete and con-

Mathematical Science

tinuous probability distributions. Central
Limit Theorem, one and two sample
hypothesis tests, analysis of variance, chi-
squared tests, nonparametric tests, linear
regression and correlation. Other topics
may include index numbers, time series,
sampling design, and experimental design.
Course also includes some use of a micro-
computer. Prerequisite: Credit for or
exemption from Mathematics 005.

105 MATHEMATICS IN

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION
This course is intended for prospective
eiementan, school teachers and is required of
all those seeking elementary certification.
Topics include systems of numbers and of
numeration, computational algorithms, en-
vironmental and transformation geometry
measurement, and mathematical concept
formation. Observation and panlcipation in
Greater Williamsport elementary schools.
Corequisite: any education course numbered
341 or above which is specifically required
for elementary certification or consent of in-
structor.

107 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo-
nometric, polynomial, and rational func-
tions, their graphs, and elementary prop-
erties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption
from Mathematics 005.

109 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS

An intuitive approach to the calculus con-
cepts with applications to business, biology,
and social-science problems. Not open to
students who have completed Mathematics
128. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption
from Mathematics 005.

112 FINITE MATHEMATICS
FOR DECISION MAKING

An introduction to some of the principal
mathematical models, not Involving calcu-
lus, which are used In business administra-
tion, social sciences, and operations re-
search. The course will Include both determi-
nistic models such as graphs, networks,
linear programming and voting models, and
probabilistic models such as Markov chains
and games Prerequisite: credit for or ex-
emption from Mathematics 005.

116 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS

An Introduction to discrete structures.
Topics Include equivalence relations, parti-
lions and quotient sets, mathematical Induc-
tion, recursive functions, elementary logic,
discrete number systems, elementary com-
binatorial theory, and general algebraic
structures emphasizing semi-groups,
groups, lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs
and trees. Prerequisite: Computer Science
125 or consent of instructor.

128-129 CALCULUS WITH ANALYTIC
GEOMETRY I & II
Differentiation and Integration of alge-
braic and trigonometric functions, conic
sections and their applications, graphing
plane curves, applications to related rate
and external problems, areas of plane
regions, volumes of solids of revolution,
and other applications; differentiation and
integration of transcendental functions,
parametric equations, polar coordinates.
Infinite sequences and series, and series
expansions of functions. Prerequisite for
128: exemption from or a grade of C or
better in Mathematics 107. Prerequisite for
129: exemption from or a grade of C or
better in Mathematics 128 or consent of
instructor.

1 30 INTRODUCTION TO
MATRIX ALGEBRA
Systems of linear equations and matrix
arthimetic. Points and hyperplanes infinite
dimensional geometries. Bases and linear
independence. Matrix representations of
linear mappings. The fixed point problem.
Special classes of matrices. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 107 or its equivalent.

214 MULTIVARIABLE STATISTICS

The study of statistical techniques involving
several variables. Topics include multiple
regression and correlation, one- and two-
way analysis of variance, analysis of
covariance, analysis of two- and three-way
contingency tables, and discriminant
analysis. Other topics may include cluster
analysis, factor analysis and canonical
correlations, repeated measure designs,
time series analysis, and nonparametric
methods. Course also includes extensive
use of a statistical package (currently
BMDP.) Prerequisite: A grade of C or
belter in Mathematics 103 or its equivalent.

231 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

A study of ordinary differential equations
and linear systems. Solution techniques in-
clude: reduction of order, undertermined
coefficients, variation of parameters, La-
place Uansforms, power series, and eigenva-
lues and eigenvectors. A brief discussion of
numerical methods may also be included
Prerequisite: a grade of C or better in
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 recom-
mended.

233 COMPLEX VARIABLES

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com-
plex integration, Cauchy's theorems and
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics
238. Alternate years.

234 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS
Topics regularly Included are the nature of
mathematical systems, essentials of logical

reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set
theory. Other topics frequently Included are
approaches to the concepts of infinity and
continuity, and the construction of the real
number system. The course serves as a
bridge from elementary calculus to advanced
courses in algebra and analysis. Prere-
quisite: Mathematics 129 or consent of in-
structor.

238 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS

Algebra, geometry, and calculus in multi-
dimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples, mat-
rices; lines, planes, curves, surfaces; vector
functions of a single variable, acceleration,
curvature; functions of several variables,
gradient; line Integrals, vector fields, multi-
ple Integrals, change of variable, areas,
volumes; Green's theorem. Prerequisites: a
grade of C or better in Mathematics 129.
Mathematics 130 or consent of instructor.

321 INTRODUCTION TO

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS
Topics from the theory of interpolation;
numerical approaches to approximating
roots and functions. Integration, systems of
differential equations, linear systems, matrix
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. Pre-
requisite: Computer Science 125 and
Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 strongh
recommended.

330 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean
geometry, and an introduction to related
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128.
Alternate years.

332-333 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I-II

A study of probability, discrete and con-
tinuous random variables, expected values
and moments, sampling, point estimation,
sampling distributions. Interval estimation,
test of hypotheses, regression and linear
hypotheses, experimental design models.
Corequisite: Mathematics 238. Alternate
years.

336 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION
A course designed for mathematics majors
who are planning to teach at the secondary
level. Emphasis will be placed on the
mathematics that form the foundation of
secondary mathematics. Ideas will be pre-
sented to familiarize the student with various
curriculum proposals, to provide for innova-
tion within the existing curriculum, and to
expand the boundaries of the existing curri-
culum. Open only to junior and senior
mathematics majors enrolled in the secon-
dary-education program. Alternate years.

338 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Queuing theory, including simulation tech-

Music

niques; optimization theoi7. Including linear
programming, integer programming, and
dynamic programming; game theory. Includ-
ing two-person zero-sum games, cooperative
games, and multlperson games. Prere-
quisite: Mathematics 1 12 or Mathematics
130. Alternate years.

432 REAL ANALYSIS

An introduction to the rigorous analysis of
the concepts of real variable calculus In the
setting of normed spaces. Topics from:
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete-
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel
theorem; functions on Euclidean space, con-
tinuity, uniform continuity, differentiability;
series and convergence; Riemann integral.
Prerequisite: Mathematics 2}4 and 238.

434 MODERN ALGEBRA

An integrated approach to groups, nngs.
fields, and vector spaces and functions which
preserve their structure. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 130 and 234.

438 SEMINAR

Topics in modem mathematics of current
interest to the instructor. A different topic Is
selected each semester. This semester Is de-
signed to provide junior and senior mathema-
tics majors and other qualified students with
more than the usual opportunity for concen-
trated and cooperative inquiry. Prerequisite:
consent of instructor. One-half unit of credit.
This course may be repeated for credit.

339 & 449 MATHEMATICS COLLOQUIA
This non-credit but required course for
junior and senior mathematics majors
offers students a chance to hear presenta-
tions on topics related to, but not directly
covered in formal mathematics courses.
Students are required to attend colloquia
each semester of their junior (339) and
senior (449) years. Mathematics majors
must present two lectures, one during the
junior year and one during the senior year.
A letter grade will be given in semesters in
which the student gives a presentation,
otherwise the grade will be P/F. Seniors
are strongly encouraged to give their
presentations during the fall semester.
Students applying for the professional
semester in education are required to give
the first presentation before the eighth
week of the fall semester of their junior
year, and the second presentation before
the eighth week of the fall semester of their
senior year. With Departmental approval,
students will be required to take three
semesters of 339 or 449; such approval is
granted only in extraordinary circum-
stances and will require the student to give
one presentation in each of the three
semesters. Noncredit course. One hour per
week.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

MUSIC

Associate Professors: Boerckel

(Chairperson), Thayer
Instructor: Janda
Part-time Instructors: Bailey, Clark,

Grube, Lakey, Leidhecker, Lipscomb,

Nacinovich, Russell, Sedlacek, Shaffer,

Steele, and White

The music major is required to take a
balanced program of music theory, his-
tory, applied music and ensemble. A
minimum of eight courses (exclusive of
all ensemble, applied music and instru-
mental and vocal methods courses) is
required and must include Music 1 10,
111,220,221, 335 and 336. Each major
must participate in an ensemble (Music
167, 168 and/or 169) and take one hour
of applied music per week for a minimum
of four semesters including the entire
period in which the individual is registered
as a music major (see Music 160-169).
The major must include at least one-half
hour of piano in the applied program
unless a piano proficiency test is requested
and passed. Anyone declaring music
as a second major must do so by the
beginning of the junior year.

Music majors seeking certification in
music education (K-12) must also take
Psychology 1 10 and 338; Education 200
and the Professional Semester; Music
261-7, 331. 332. 446 and pass the piano
proficiency examination. Students who
wish to obtain certification in music
education should consult with the depart-
ment as soon as possible, preferably be-
fore scheduling classes for the freshman
year.

The Music Department recommends
that non-majors select courses from the
following list to meet distribution re-
quirements: Music 1 16, 117; Music 128;
Music 1 13 or Music 224 in combination

with 116, 117. or 128.

Student recitals offer opportunities to
gain experience in public performance.
Music majors and other students qual-
ified in performance may present formal
recitals.

110-111 MUSIC THEORY 1 AND 11

A two-semester course open to all students.
An examination of the fundamental compo-
nents and theoretical concepts of music The
student will develop musicianship through
application of applied skills. (Music 1 10 is
prerequisite !o Music 111).

113 MUSIC OF TODAY

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques
and contents of music produced since 1950.
with emphasis on developments In electronic
music. Leading figures of major contempor-
ary movements In music, literature and the
visual arts and their works will be presented
and discussed in relation to musical culture.
The course will include some practical expo-
sure to the electronic music studio and re-
cording techniques.

1 16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC

A basic course in the materials and techni-
ques of music . Examples drawn from various
periods and styles are designed to enhance
perception and appreciation through careful
and informed listening.

117 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC

A chronological survey of music In Western
civilization from Middle Ages to the present.
Composers and musical styles are considered
in the context of the broader culture of each
major era.

128 AMERICAN MUSIC

An introductory survey of all types of
American music from pre-Revolutionary
days to the present. Categories to be
covered are folk music of different origins,
the development of show music into Broad-
way musicals, serious concert music for
large and small ensembles, jazz and
various popular musics from "Tin Pan
Alley" to Rock to New Wave. Alternate
years.

135-136 INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I
AND II

An introduction to the techniques of basic
movement and interpretation in ballet,
jazz, and modern dance. Classes include
improvisation and choreography. Pre-
requisite for Music 136: Music 135 or
consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit each. Not open to students who have
received credit for Theatre 135-136 or
Theatre 235-236.

Music

137 HISTORY OF THE DANCE I

A survey of classical ballet from the Ballets
de cour of 17th century France to the
present with emphasis on the contributions
of Petipa, Fokien, Cecchetti, and Balan-
chine. One-half unit of credit. Not open
to students who have received credit for
Theatre 137 or J 38.

138 HISTORY OF THE DANCE ii

A survey of the forms of dance, excluding
classical ballet, as independent works of
art and as they have reflected the history
of civilization from primitive times to the
present. Prerequisite: Music 137 or consent
of instructor. One-half unit of credit. Not
open to students who have received credit
for Theatre 137 or 138.

220-221 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV

A continuation of the integrated theory
course moving toward newer uses of music
materials. Prerequisite: Music 111.

224 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I

A non-technical introduction to electronic
music and MIDI (Musical Instrument
Digital Interface) for the major and
non-major alike. The course traces the
development of MIDI from its origin to
present-day digital synthesizers in combi-
nation with sequencing computers.

225 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II

Further consideration of recording techni-
ques. Use of microphones, multi-track re-
cording, mixing, special effects devices and
synchronization will be introduced. Students
will take part in live recording of concens
and rehearsals of a variety of ensembles.
Student projects will include complete re-
cording sessions and the production of elec-
tronic music compositions utilizing classical
studio techniques and real-time networks.
Prerequisite: Music 224 or consent of in-
structor. A Iternate years.

235-236 INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II
Studies of the techniques of basic move-
ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz and
modern dance at the intermediate level.
Classes include improvisation and chore-
ography. Prerequisite for Music 235:
Music 136 or consent of instructor. Pre-
requisite for Music 236: Music 235 or
consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit each. Not open to students who have
received credit for Theatre 135-136 or
Theatre 235-236.

330 COMPOSITION I

Creative writing in smaller vocal and in-
strumental forms. Students identify and use
the techniques employed by major compos-

ers of the 20th century . Prerequisite: Music
11 1 or consent of instructor.

33 1 CONDUCTING

A study of the fundamentals of conducting
with frequent opportunity for practical ex-
perience. The College music organizations
serve to make performance experience possi-
ble Prerequisite: Music 1 10-1 H or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.

332 TEACHING MUSIC IN THE SCHOOLS
Methods and materials of teaching music in
the schools with emphasis on curriculum de-
velopment and procedures for choral and in-
strumental ensembles at the elementary and
secondary levels. Course work will include
observation of music classes in elementary
and secondary schools in the greater Wil-
liamsport area. Alternate years.

335 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I

The development of musical styles and forms
from Gregorian chant through Mozart, in-
cluding composers from the medieval. Re-
naissance, baroque and early classical eras

336 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II
The development of musical styles and forms
from Beethoven to the present, including
composers from the late classical, romantic
and modem eras.

339 ORCHESTRATION

A study of modem orchestral instruments
and examination of their use by the great
masters with practical problems in instru-
mentation. The College music organizations
serve to make performance experience possi-
ble. Prerequisite: Music J 10-11 1 or consent
of instructor. Alternate years.

440 COMPOSITION II

Creative writing in larger vocal and in-
strumental forms. Students write more ex-
tended works in order to develop an indi-
vidual style of composition. Prerequisite:
Music 330 or consent of instructor.

442 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC

Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro-
duction. Notation systems for electronic
music. Aesthetics of electronic music. Stu-
dents will use the full resources of the studio
to complete original compositions and will
study, prepare and present works by major
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite:
Music 225 or consent of instructor.

445 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC

The intensive study of a selected area of
music literature, designed to develop re-
search techniques in music. The topic is
announced at the Spring pre-registration.
Sample topics include: Beethoven, Impress-

ionism. Vienna 1900-1914. Prerequisite:
Music 116. 117 or 221 or consent of in-
structor.

446 RECITAL

The preparation and presentation of a full-
length public recital, normally during the
student's senior year. Prerequisite: approval
by the department. May be repeated for
credit.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

Applied Music and Ensemble

The study of performance in piano, harpsi-
chord, voice, organ, strings, guitar, brass,
woodwinds, and percussion is designed to
develop sound technique and a knowledge of the
appropriate literature for the instrument. Student
recitals offer opportunities to gain experience in
public performance.

Credit for applied music courses (private
lessons) and ensemble (choir, orchestra and
band) is earned on a fractional basis. One half-
hour lesson per week earns '/: hour credit; one
hour lesson per week earns one hour credit.
Ensemble credit totals one hour credit if a
student enrolls for one or two ensembles (for
more information, see course descriptions
below). When scheduling please note that an
applied course or ensemble should not be
substituted for an academic course, but should
be taken in addition to the normal four academic
courses.

Extra fees apply for private lessons (Music
160-166) as follows:

$150 per semester for a half-hour lesson per
week. $300 per semester for an hour lesson per
week. Private lessons are given for 13 weeks.
160 Piano or Harpsichord, 161 Voice, 162
Strings or Guitar, 163 Organ, 164 Brass, 165
Woodwinds, 166 Percussion.

167 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra
allows students with significant instrumental
experience to become members of this re-
gional ensemble. Participation in the
W.S.O. is contingent upon audition and the
availability of openings. Students are
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble
credit per semester, A student who is enrol-
led in orchestra only should register for
Music 167B (one hour credit). A student may
belong to two ensembles, choosing either
Choir or Wind Ensemble as the second
group. Such a student will then register for
Music I67A [Vi hour credit) plus either
Music 168A ('/2 hour credit) or Music 169A
('/2 hour credit).

Nursing

168 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR)
Participation in the College choir is designed
to enable any student possessing at least
average talent an opportunity to study choral
technique. Emphasis is placed upon ac-
quaintance with choral literature, tone pro-
duction, diction, and phrasing Students are
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble
credit pier semester. A student who is enrol-
led in Choir only should register for Music
168B (one hour credit). A student may be-
long to two ensembles, choosing either
Orchestra or Wind Ensemble as the second
group. Such a student will then register for
Music 168 A ('/2 hour credit) plus either
Music 167A C/i hour credit) or Music 169A
('/2 hour credit). If a student has auditioned
and been selected for the twenty voice Cham-
ber Choir ( no credit available) , he/she should
register for Music 168C.

169 CONCERT BAND

The College Concert Band allows students
with some instrumental experience to be-
come acquainted with good band literature
and develop personal musicianship through
participation in group instrumental activity.
Students are allowed a maximum of one
hour of Ensemble credit per semester. A
student who is enrolled in Band only
should register for Music 169B (one hour
credit). A student may belong to two
ensembles, choosing either Orchestra or
Choir as the second group. Such a student
will then register for Music 169A ('/; hour
credit) plus either Music 167A (Vi hour
credit) or Music 168A ('/; hour credit).

INSTRUMENTAL AND VOCAL
METHODS

Instrumental and vocal methods classes are
designed to provide students seeking
certification in music education with a
basic understanding of all standard band
and orchestral instruments as well as a
familiarity with fundamental techniques of
singing.

Music 261: Brass Methods

(one hour credit)

Music 262: Percussion Methods

(one hour credit)

Music 263. 264: String Methods I and II
(one hour credit each)

Music 265: Vocal Methods

(one hour credit)

Music 266, 267: Woodwind Methods I
and II (one hour credit each)

NEAR EAST CULTURE
AND ARCHAEOLOGY

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator)

The Near East culture and archaeology
interdisciplinary major is designed to ac-
quaint students with the "cradle of West-
em civilization," both in its ancient and
modem aspects. Majors will complete a
minimum of eight to ten courses related
to the Near East.

Required courses are described in their
departmental sections and include:

1 . Four courses in language and culture
from:

History and Culture of the Ancient
Near East (Religion 228)
History of Art (Art 222)
Ancient History (History 210)
Old Testament Faith and History
(Religion 113)

Judaism and Islam (Religion 224)
Two semesters of foreign language
(Hebrew 101-102, orGreek 101-102)

2. Two courses in archaeology from:
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226)
Special Archaeology courses, such as
independent studies or in May or
summer terms in the Near East.

3. Two courses in the cooperating de-
partments (art, history, political science,
religion and sociology-anthropology) or
related departments. These two courses,
usually taken in the junior or senior
years, can be independent study. Topics
should be related either to the ancient or
the modern Near East and must be
approved in advance by the committee
supervising the interdisciplinary prog-
ram. The study of modem Arabic or
Hebrew is encouraged.

Other courses may be suggested by the
supervisory committee within the limits
of a 10-course major. The number of
courses taken within this program applic-
able toward fulfilling the College dis-
tribution requirements will vary accord-
ing to the selection of courses.

NURSING

Associate Professor: Parrish

(Chairperson)
Assistant Professors: Fulton, Kasputis,

Pagana
Instructors: Ficca, Martini (on leave),

Gray-Vickrey (on leave)

Part-time Instructors: Bird, Gabriel,
McKeegan

Students wishing to major in nursing
will be admitted to the College under the
usual admission procedures. Freshmen
should follow the nursing curriculum
plan for the freshman year in the sequ-
ence designated. To be considered for
continuation in nursing, a minimum
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion
of the freshman year. A supplementary
application should be submitted to the
Department of Nursing by January 30 of
the freshman year.

Registered Nurses

The Department of Nursing offers an
alternative curriculum for registered
nurses within the existing BSN program.
The goals of this alternative curriculum
are to provide registered nurses with the
opportunity to earn an educationally
sound BSN degree while completing the
degree requirements in as short a time
period as possible, and to meet the uni-
que needs of registered nurses. Nursing
300 and 310 are open only to registered
nurses and are required as part of the
alternative curriculum. Registered nurses
may challenge for credit the following
nursing courses: Nursing 220, the skills
component of Nursing 221, the obste-
trical component of Nursing 330, 331,
332, 333, 334, and 440. For successful
challenge of any clinical nursing course
by registered nurses, a grade of C- or
better is required; that is, 70% or 1 .67
is required in both the theoretical and
clinical components of the course.

In addition, registered nurses in this
program may challenge for credit any
required nonrfUfsing course provided that
they obtain the permission of both the
Department of Nursing and the depart-
ment in which that course is offered.
These examinations may not be available
for every required course.

Additional information for registered
nurses seeking the BSN is available from
the Department of Nursing. Individual
advisement is offered to all registered
nurses.

Clinical Learning Resources

In addition to the College's new well-

Nursing

equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportun-
ity for self-learning is provided in the
adjacent Learning Center which is equip-
ped with electronic study carrels and au-
dio-visual materials.

A wide variety of health-care agencies
in the surrounding area are utilized for
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos-
pitals and agencies include: Divine Pro-
vidence Hospital, Williamsport Hospital
and Medical Center, Evangelical Hospit-
al, Geisinger Medical Center, Leader
Nursing Home and Rehabilitation Cen-
ter, Danville State Hospital, Pennsylva-
nia Department of Health, Regional
Home Health Services, Roseview Manor
and The Williamsport Home.

Expenses of the Nursing Program

Students are responsible for their own
transportation to assigned clinical areas.
The student of nursing assumes all finan-
cial obligations listed in the section on
fees in this bulletin including a $40 lab
fee for each of the clinical nursing
courses (Nursing 221, 310, 330, 331,
332, 333, 440 and 441). Additional ex-
penses include uniforms, name pin,
watch with second hand, bandage scis-
sors, stethoscope, blood pressure cuff,
liability insurance, annual health ex-
aminations, and standardized achieve-
ment tests.

Students must also maintain annual
Health Provider CPR certification as
offered by the American Heart Associ-
ation or American Red Cross.

Major in Nursing

The major in nursing consists of:
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332, 333,
334, 336, 435, 440, 441, 442, and nurs-
ing elective (420, 422, 430 or 443) or
N80-N89. In addition, the following are
prerequisites for specific nursing courses:
Chemistry 108, 115; Biology 113-114,
226; Psychology 110, 117; Mathematics
103, and Computer Science elective
CPTR 108, 125, or Math 214. The
religion/philosophy distribution require-
ment is met by the required courses:
Philosophy 219 and Religion 120. The
history/social science distribution
requirement is met by the required
courses: Psychology 110 and 117. In

addition, the student is required to take
our course from among Sociology/
Anthropology 110, 114, 220, 222, 224,
227, 228, 229, 331, 334, and 335. The
fine arts/foreign language distribution
requirement can be met by two courses
in one department from among art,
literature, music, or theatre; or by two
courses in foreign language on the
intermediate or higher course level.

School Nurse Certification

The Department of Nursing, in col-
laboration with the Department of
Education, offers an additional curri-
culum for the Registered Nurse with
a Bachelors degree (or a Lycoming
College nursing student) who wishes to
be certified as a school nurse. The goal
of this program is to provide the RN with
a Bachelors degree an opportunity for
career mobility. Courses required for
completion of the certification program
consist of: Education 200 and 239,
Philosophy 217, Psychology 338, and
Nursing 420, 422, 430, and 431. In
addition, the following are prerequisites
for specific courses: Psychology 1 10 and
117, Sociology ****, and Nur 220.

Additional information for registered
nurses seeking School Nurse Certifica-
tion is available from the Department of
Nursing. Individualized advisement is
offered to all prospective School Nurse
candidates.

Policies Specific to Nursing

In addition to the Lycoming College
continuance policies, the following poli-
cies are specific to all declared majors in
the Department of Nursing:

1 . A grade of C - or better is required in
all clinical nursing courses to continue in
the nursing program. These courses are
Nursing 221. 310, 330, 331, 332, 333.
440 and 44 1 . Students who earn a grade
of less than 70 percent or 1 .67 in either
the theoretical or clinical component of a
nursing course will be required to repeat
both components of the course before
being permitted to continue in the nurs-
ing sequence.

2. Policies regarding absence from clas-
ses or from the clinical portion of nursing
courses are determined by the instruc-

tor(s) responsible for the course. No abs-
ence from the clinical portion of the
course will be excused other than for
illness or family emergency with one ex-
ception. In individual cases, students
may make arrangements with instructors
to be excused for extracurricular activi-
ties. Excessive absences for any reason
will necessitate repeating the entire
course.

Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N.

FRESHMAN YEAR

Fall

Chem. 108* (Inorganic

Chemistry) 1

Eng. 106 (Composition) 1

Psych. I10*(lntro to Psych.) ... 1

Fine Arts/Lang 1

Physical Education 0

4
Spring
Chem. 1 15*(Brief Organic

Chemistry) 1

Eng. Elective I

Psych. 1 l7*(Developmenta!

Psych.) 1

Fine Arts/Lang 1

Physical Education 0

4
SOPHOMORE YEAR

Fall

Bio. 113

(Anatomy and
Physiology)

Computer

Science Elective**

Nur. 220

(Concepts of
Nutrition in

Family Health)

.75

Rel. 120

(Death and Dying) .

3.75

Spring

Bio. 114

(Anatomy and
Phvsioloev)

Math 103

(Intro, to
Statistics)

Bio. 226

(Microbiology for
Health Sciences) ...

Nur. 221

(Foundations of
Professional

Practice)

1.25

4.25

Nursing

JUNIOR YEAR

Fall
Nur.

330

Nur. 332

Nur. 334

(Nursing Care of the
Developing

Family I) I.

(Nursing Care of the

Adult I) 1.

(Basic Concepts of
Pharmacology and
Therapeutics) 1

Spring
Nur. 331

Nur. 333

(Nursing Care of the
Developing

Family II) 1.5

(Nursing Care of the
AduU II) 1.5

May Term

Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the
Social System) ...

SENIOR YEAR

Fall

Nur. 435 (Nursing

Research) 1

Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the

Emotionally

Troubled

Individual &

Family) 1.5

Nursing Elective*** 5

Guided Elective**** 1

Spring

Nur. 441 (Comprehensive

Nursing Care) 1.5

Nur. 442 (Professional

Issues) 5

Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in

Biology and

Medicine) 1

Elective 1

*Prerequisite to Sophomore year.
**Student must select one course from
CPTR 108. 125 or Math 214.
***Student must select one course from

NUR 420, 422, 430, 443, or N80-89.
****Student must select one course from
See. 1 10, 1 14, 220, 222, 224, 227, 228,
229, 331, 334, or 335. Other courses
may be approved on an individual basis.
Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units
(128 Credits).

The student may take additional units for
electives, independent study and/or
honors.

220 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION
IN FAMILY HEALTH

Essentials of normal nutrition and their rela-
tionship to the health of individuals and fami-
lies. These concepts serve as a basis for the
development of an understanding of ther-
apeutic application of dietary pnnciples and
the health professional's role and responsi-
bility in this facet of client care. Three hours
of lecture. % unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry
JOS. J 15, or consent of instructor. Open to
non-nursing majors.

221 FOUNDATIONS OF
PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE
Introduction of major theoretical elements
underlying professional nursing practice.
Focus on the concept of health and common
health problems recognizing the multi-
directional influence of the individual, fami-
ly, and environment. In this first clinical
course the student will utilize the nursing
process in assisting clients to attain a max-
imum level of functioning. Three hours of
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory.
I'A units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108.
115, Nursing 220. and Biology 113. Open to
nursing majors only.

300 THEORETICAL FOUNDATIONS
OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING
Theoretical concepts underlying profession-
al practice. Additional focus on health and
common health problems, recognition of
multi-directional influence of the individual,
family, and environment. Two hour seminar,
'h unit. Prerequisites: Successful completion
of Nursing 221 challenge examination.
Chem 108. 115: Psvch 110. 117: Bio 113,
OPEN TO RNs ONLY.

310 PROCESSES ESSENTIAL
TO NURSING PRACTICE
Clinical focus on the incorporation of nurs-
ing, group, interpersonal, and change pro-
cesses: therapeutic communication, family.
health promotion and community concepts,
physical assessment, collaboration, and
leachingl learning principles in the commun-
ity setting. -'A unit. Prerequisites: Successful
completion of Nursing 330 and Nursing 332
challenge exams. Bio 114. and Bio 226.
OPEN TO RNs ONLY.

330-331

NURSING CARE OF THE
DEVELOPING FAMILY

Examination of health and nursing needs of
beginning and developing families. Initial
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and
infants within the family unit as well as the
common health problems of children through
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on nurs-
ing needs of children and mothers with health
problems of actue and long term nature, the
influence of illness on their development and
the effect of illness on the family configura-
tion. Three hours of lecture and T/2 hours
clinical laboratory. I'/i units. Prerequisite
for Nursing 330: Nursing 221 , Biology 114.
226. Prerequisite for Nursing 331: Nursing
330 and 334.

332-333 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT
Identification of adult health care needs and
implementation of nursing activities based
on an understanding of growth and develop-
ment, pathophysiology, communication
skills, interpersonal dynamics, and
psychosocial interventions. Three hours of
lecture and 7'/? hours clinical laboratory.
l'/2 units. Prerequisite for Nursing 332:
Nursing 221. Biology 114 and 226. Core-
quisite: Nursing 334. Prerequisite for Nurs-
ing 333: Nursing 332 and 334.

334 BASIC CONCEPTS OF
PHARMACOLOGY AND
THERAPEUTICS

Fundamentals of pharmacology and ther-
apeutics are presented for the various classes
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and
physiological processes. Interactions and
toxicological aspects of drug therapy are re-
viewed. Four hours of lecture. 1 unit. Core-
quisite: Nursing 330, 332, or consent of in-
structor. Open to non-nursing majors.

336 THE NURSE IN

THE SOCIAL SYSTEM
Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories of
social systems. Examination of induction
into the hospital system. Evaluation of stan-
dards of care. Focus on utilization of change
theory. Twelve hours of lecture and 96 hours
of clinical laboratory. I unit. Prerequisites:
Nursing 331. 333. 334. Required for the
nursing major and offered only in May term.

420 HEALTH ASSESSMENT

Identification and examination of methods
for collecting and categorizing accurate data
necessary for professional care. Emphasis is
placed on the individual throughout the life
span with identification of clinical and be-
havioral findings appropriate to each age
group. Two hours of lecture for '/: unit. Two
hours of lecture and a 5 hour clinical labora-

Philosophy

lory for 1 unit. Prerequisites: Senior stand-
ing or consent of instructor.

All HEALTH EDUCATION

Examination of learning theories appropri-
ate to all age groups. Discussion of the
concepts and techniques necessary for
assessment, planning, implementation and
evaluation of the teaching/learning pro-
cess. Emphasis will be placed on self-care.
Two-hour lecture for Vi unit. Two-hour
lecture and a 5 hour clinical laboratory for
1 unit. School Nurse candidates must take
the one-unit course. Prerequisites: Senior
standing or consent of instructor.

430 COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING
Overview of the role of the community
health nurse in a vanety of settings, e.g..
industries, state health clinics, MHMR,
school systems. Discussion of wellness
promotion, availability of communiy re-
sourcs, environmental health, prevention
and treatment of communicable diseases,
and group process with emphasis on com-
munication skills. Two hour lecture for '/;
unit. Two hour lecture and a 5 hour clinical
laboratory for 1 unit. School Nurse candi-
dates must take the equivalent of one unit
course. Prerequisites: Senior standing or
consent of the instructor.

431 SCHOOL NURSE PRACTICUM
Essentials of school health, school nursing
and health promotion. These concepts serve
as a basis for the development of an under-
standing of the role of the school nurse. This
course provides the student with the oppor-
tunity to function In the role of the school
nurse. It is a course built on the culmination
of knowledge obtained in previous nursing
courses and nursing experiences. 210 hours
clinical and seminar. I '/z unit. Prerequisites:
OPEN TO SCHOOL NURSE CANDIDATES
who have met all other requirements for cer-
tification and have obtained departmental
approval.

435 RESEARCH IN NURSING

Expansion of theoretical basis of research
methodology with emphasis on analyzing,
criticizing, and interpreting nursing re-
search. Development of a research pro-
posal focusing on a nursing problem. Four
hours of lecture. I unit. Prerequisite:
Mathematics 103, Computer Science
elective, and Nursing 330 and 332 or
consent of instructor. Open to non-nursing
majors.

440 NURSING CARE OF THE

EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY
Examination of disturbed human rela-
tionships with focus on intrapsychic, inter-

personal, and physiologic etiology. Emph-
asis on advanced therapeutic nurse-patient
relationships within context of family, com-
munity, and health care systems. Three
hours of lecture and 7'/: hours clinical
laboratorv. /'/? units. Prerequisites: Nurs-
ing 331. 333. 336.

441 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE
Culminating nursing course with focus on
leadership and management skills in a choice
of clinical settings. Seminars provide oppor-
tunities for students to share commonalities
and unique aspects of professional practice.
Three hours of lecture and T/z hours of cli-
nical laboratory. I'/: units. Prerequisites:
Nursing 336. 440.

442 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES

An analysis of nursing issues in the context
of the historical background of the profes-
sion, the social forces which influence nurs-
ing, and nursing's impact upon society. Two-
hour seminar. V: unit. Prerequisite: Senior
standing or consent of instructor.

443 TOPICS IN NURSING

Selected topic courses in nursing designed to
permit students to pursue subjects which,
because of their specialized nature, may not
be offered on a regular basis, '/r unit. Prere-
quisite: Senior standing or consent of in-
structor.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
IN NURSING
An opportunity to develop and implement an
individual plan of study under faculty gui-
dance. '/- unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing
or consent of chairperson.

PHILOSOPHY

Associate Professors: Griffith,

Whelan
Assistant Professor: Herring

(Chairperson)

The study of philosophy develops a
critical understanding of the basic con-
cepts and presuppositions around which
we organize our thought in science,
religion, education, morality, the arts,
and other human enterprises,

A major in philosophy, together with
appropriate other courses, can provide
an excellent preparation for policy-
making positions of many kinds, for
graduate study in several fields, and
for careers in education, law, and the

ministry. The major in philosophy
consists of eight courses numbered 1 10
or above, including 438, 439, 449 and at
least three other courses numbered 225
or above.

A minor in Philosophy consists of any
four philosophy courses numbered 220
or above; or any five philosophy courses
number 1 10 or above, three of which
must be numbered 300 or above. Three
more specialized minors are also avail-
able: a minor in Philosophy and Law
consists of four courses from Philosophy
224, 225, 334, 335, 449 or Independent
Studies or five courses including any
three courses from the preceding list and
any two courses from Philosophy 115.
216. 218, 219; a minor in Philosophy
ant/5c/e/7ce consists of four courses from
Philosophy 223, 225, 331. 333. 449 or
Independent Studies; a minor in the His-
tory of Philosophy consists of four
courses from Philosophy 223. 224, 438,
439, 449 or Independent Studies. Since
topics in Philosophy 449 and indepen-
dent studies projects vary, these courses
may be used to count toward a special-
ized minor only if they are approved in
advance by the department.

105 PRACTICAL REASONING

A general introduction to topics in logic and
their application to practical reasoning, with
primary emphasis on detecting fallacies,
evaluating Inductive reasoning, and under-
standing the rudiments of scientific method.

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS

An introductory course designed to show
the nature of philosophy by examination of
several examples of problems which have
received extended attention in philosophical
literature. These topics often include the
relation of the mind to the body, the possi-
bility of human freedom, arguments about
the existence of God, the conditions of
knowledge, and the relation of language to
thought. Some attention is also given to the
principles of acceptable reasoning.

1 14 PHILOSOPHY AND
PERSONAL CHOICE
An introductory philosophical examination
of a number of contemporary moral issues
which call for personal decision. Topics
often investigated include: the "good" life,
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abortion,
suicide and death, violence and pacifism,
obedience to the law, the relevance of per-

Philosophy

sonal beliefs to morality. Discussion centers
on some of the suggestions philosophers
have made about how to make such deci-
sions.

1 15 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY
An introductory philosophical examination
of the moral and conceptual dimension of
various contemporary public issues, such as
the relation of ethics to politics and the law.
the enforcement of morals, the problems of
fair distribution of goods and opportunities,
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natur-
al resources, and the application of ethics to
business practice. Discussion centers on
some of the suggestions philosophers have
made about how to deal with these issues

117 PHILOSOPHY AND SUPERNATURAL
PHENOMENA

A critical examination of the philosophi-
cal issues raised by near death and out of
body experiences, ESP, time travel, reports
of ghosts and spirits, astrology, prophecy,
demon possession, faith healing, miracles,
psychokinesis, and the like. Offered May
and Summer terms only.

216 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS

An introductory philosophical examination
of a variety of moral problems that arise
concerning the American business system.
Included are a systematic consideration of
typical moral problems faced by individuals
and an examination of common moral criti-
cisms of the business system itself.

217 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN EDUCATION

An examination of the basic concepts
involved in thought about education, and a
consideration of the various methods for
justifying educational proposals. Typical of
the issues discussed are: Are education and
indoctrination different' What is a liberal
education? Are education and schooling
compatible? What do we need to learn '
Alternate years.

218 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE

An introductory examination of various
philosophical issues and concepts which are
of special importance in legal contexts. Dis-
cussion includes both general topics, such
as the justification of punishment, and more
specific topics, such as the insanity defense
and the rights of the accused. Readings are
arranged topically and include both classical
and contemporary sources.

219 ETHICAL ISSUES IN
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE

A philosophical investigation of some of the
ethical issues which arise as a result of con-
temporary medical and biological technolo-
gy. Typical of these issues are euthanasia.

behavior control, patient rights, experimen-
tation on humans, fetal research, abortion,
genetic engineering, population control, and
distribution of health resources.

223 HISTORY OF SCIENCE
AND METAPHYSICS

An historical survey of the attempt to
understand the physical universe. Particu-
lar attention is paid to common origins of
philosophy and science in the works of the
ancient Greek philosophers, to the ques-
tion of how scientific and philosophical
thinking differs from mythological and
technological thinking, to the rationalism
empiricism dispute in science and meta-
physics, and to the interaction between
philosophy and science in the formulating
fundamental questions about the physical
universe and in developing and criticizing
concepts designed to answer them. Alter-
nate years.

224 HISTORY OF SOCIAL AND
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY

An historical survey of the most important
social and political philsophers from
Socrates to Marx. Special attention is paid
to the relationship between ethics and
politics as seen by Plato and Aristotle and
to the social contract theories of Hobbes,
Locke, and Rousseau. Alternate years.

225 SYMBOLIC LOGIC

A study of modem symbolic logic and its
application to the analysis of arguments. In-
cluded are truth-functional relations, the
logic of propositional functions, and deduc-
tive systems. Attention is also given to va-
rious topics in the philosophy of logic.

331 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE
An examination of a variety of classical and
contemporary philosophical questions about
human nature. Among the questions typical-
ly considered are these: Is there such a thing
as human nature? Are human beings diffe-
rent, in any fundamental way. from other
animals? Are human beings free? Is human
consciousness just a brain process? Are hu-
man beings inherently predisposed to evil?
Are human beings biologically determined to
be selfish or aggressive ' Are the differences
in achievement between men and women
biologically based? Prerequisite: Students
without previous study in philosophy must
have instructor' s permission.

332 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION

A philosophical examination of religion. In-
cluded are such topics as the nature of reli-
gious discourse, arguments for and against
the existence of God, and the relation be-
tween religion and science. Readings from
classical and contemporary sources. Prere-

quisite: students without previous study in
philosophy must have instructor's permis-
sion. Alternate years.

333 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE
A consideration of philosophically important
conceptual problems arising from reflection
about natural science, including such topics
as the nature of scientific laws and theories,
the character of explanation, the import of
prediction, the existence of "non-
observable" theoretical entities such as elec-
trons and genes, the problem of justifying
induction, and various puzzles associated
with probability. Prerequisite: students
without previous study in philosophy must
have instructor's permission. Alternate
years.

334 CONTEMPORARY
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY

A systematic philosophical investigation of
the relation between human nature and the
proper social and political order. Topics stu-
died include the purpose of government, the
nature of legitimate authority, the foundation
of human rights, and the limits of human
freedom. Emphasis is placed on the logic of
social and political thought and on the analy-
sis of basic principles and concepts. Prere-
quisite: students without previous philoso-
phy must have instructor's permission.

335 ETHICAL THEORY

An inquiry concerning the grounds which
distinguish morally right from morally
wrong actions. Central to the course is critic-
al consideration of the proposals and the
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians,
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite:
students without previous study in philoso-
phy must have instructor's permission.

438 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY

A critical examination of the ancient Greek
philosophers, with particular emphasis on
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two
courses in philosophy or consent of instruc-
tor. Alternate years.

439 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY

A critical examination of the Continental
Rationalists (Descartes. Spinoza. Leibniz),
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley,
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: mo courses
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter-
nate years.

449 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR

An investigation carried on by discussions
and papers, into one philosophical problem,
text, philosopher, or movement A different
topic is selected each semester Recent topics
include artifical intelligence, the ethics of

Physical Education

research of human subjects, hfe after death,
personal identity, and human nghts. This
seminar Is designed to provide junior and
senior philosophy majors and other qualified
students with more than the usual opportun-
ity for concentrated and cooperative mquiry.
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. This
seminar may he repeated for credit.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Recent independent studies in philosophy in-
clude Nietzsche, moral education. Rawls'
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia.
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)

PHYSICAL EDUCATION

Associate Professor: Burch
Assistant Professor: Whitehill
Instructor: Holmes (Chairperson)

Athletic Training Internship

Lycoming College established an
apprenticeship program in 1979 after
recognizing two conditions: the impor-
tance of the care and prevention of
athletic injuries by trained professionals,
and the career's promising growth
potential.

To complete the internship students
are required to take the five courses listed
below as well as Biology 113 & 114 and
Nursing 220. Students also are required
to undergo practical work under the
supervision of Lycoming's certified
athletic trainer. Students are officially
accepted into the Internship program
after successful completion of the first
year of practical work and Athletic
Training 110.

Students who finish the Internship
program become eligible to participate
in the National Athletic Trainers
Association (N.A.T.A.) Certification
examination to earn the status of an
N.A.T.A. certified trainer. This
Internship program also allows the
passing students to qualify for the State
examination to become Class B athletic
trainers under Pennsylvania Act 63
P.S.SI310.1.

Athletic training classes do not count
toward fulfilling graduation require-
ments except as the Physical education
requirements of two courses.

1 10 BASIC ATHLETIC TRAINING

Covers the basics in prevention, evalu-
ation, treatment, and rehabilitation of
athletic injuries. Two lectures, one lab
per week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite:
CPR certification and Basic First Aid
certification.

210 KINESIOLOGY

The study of the principle types of muscular
movements. Three lectures per week.
Three credit hours. Prerequisite: Biology
113 & 114.

220 BIOMECHANICS

The study of the mechanical and physio-
logical aspects of human movement. Three
lectures per week. Three credit hours.
Prerequisite: A.T. 210.

310 ADVANCED ATHLETIC TRAINING

A more in depth course in injury evalu-
ation, rehabilitation, and therapeutic
modalities. Three lectures per week. Three
credit hours. Prerequisite: A.T. 110.

410 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY

The study of the effects of exercise on the
human body. Two lectures and one lab
per week. Three credit hours. Prerequisite:
Instructor approval. Alternate years.

Physical Education

101 PHYSICAL EDUCATION

Coeducational physical education classes.
Basic instructions in fundamentals, knowl-
edge, and appreciation of sports that
include swimming, tennis, volleyball,
archery, soccer, golf, badminton, physical
fitness, and other activities. Backpacking,
cross-country and alpine skiing, jogging,
modern aance, and cycling are offered on
a contract basis. Beginning swimming is
required for all non-swimmers. Students
may select any activity offered. A reason-
able degree of proficiency is required in
the activities. Emphasis is on the potential
use of activities as recreational and leisure-
time interests. Two semesters of physical
education (two hours per week) are
required. All physical education classes are
open to men and women.

POLITICAL SCIENCE

Professors: Giglio, Roskin

(Chairperson)
Part-time Instructor: Wolf

The major is designed to provide a
systematic understanding of government
and politics at the international, national,
state, and local levels. Majors are en-
couraged to develop their faculties to
make independent, objective analyses
which can be applied to the broad spec-
trum of the social sciences.

Although the political science major is
not designed as a vocational major, stu-
dents with such training may go directly
into government service, journalism,
teaching, or private administrative agen-
cies. A political science major can pro-
vide the base for the study of law , or for
graduate studies leading to administra-
tive work in federal, state, or local gov-
ernments, international organizations, or
college teaching. Students seeking certi-
fication to teach secondary school social
studies may major in political science but
should consult their advisors and the
education department.

A major consists of eight political sci-
ence courses, including Political Science
1 16. Prospective majors are encouraged
to register for this course during their
freshman year. An exemption will be
granted only if it strengthens the stu-
dent's program. In addition to 116, stu-
dents must take at least one course in
each of five areas (A to E). Students are
encouraged, also, to select a minor in
another department in accordance with
their academic and career interests and in
consultation with their departmental
advisor.

For non-majors, the department offers
three minors: a minor in Political Science
consists of any four courses numbered
200 or above from areas A to E; a minor
in Foreign Affairs consists of four
courses selected from Political Science
220, 225, 243, 326, 327, 438 and 439; and
a minor in Legal Studies consists of
Political Science 331, 335, 436 and one
other course numbered 200 or above.
Students are encouraged to consult with
department members on the selection of
a minor.

1 16 INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS
An introductory course in political science that asks
how and why people form political communities,
what holds them together, and how political sys-

Political Science

tems may either improve or damage themselves.
Includes comparison of the U.S. with other coun-
tries and discussion of current political and public-
policy issues.

A. American Politics

no GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
IN THE UNITED STATES
An introduction to American national gov-
ernment which emphasizes both structural-
functional analysis and policy-making pro-
cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu-
tive, and judicial branches of government,
attention will be given to political parties and
interest groups, elections and voting be-
havior, and constitutional nghts Recom-
mended to all social science-education ma-
jors and to those students who have had in-
adequate or insufficient preparation in Amer-
ican government.

1 1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT
An examination of the general principles,
major problems, and political processes of
the states and their subdivisions, together
with their role in a federal type of govern-
ment.

223 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY

A study of the office and powers of the presi-
dent with analysis of his major roles as chief
administrator, legislator, political leader,
foreign policy maker, and commander-in-
chief. Special attention is given to those pres-
idents who led the nation boldly. Subject to
student demand, but offered at least once
during a four-year cycle.

B. Legal Studies

331 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES

What are our rights and liberties as Amer-
icans? What should they be^ A frank discus-
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu-
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights,
the nghls of criminal suspects and defen-
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal
protection of the laws. Students will read and
brief the more important Supreme Court de-
cisions. Prerequisite: junior or senior stand-
ing or consent of instructor.

335 LAW AND SOCIETY

An examination of the nature, sources, func-
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of
political and social control. Included for dis-
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty,
and minority groups. Prerequisite, junior or
senior standing or consent of instructor.

436 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION
An examination of the legal structure and the
system by which mass communication is
controlled in this society. The forces which
shape, influence, and make policy will be
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Com-
munication 331 . Prerequisite: junior or
senior standing or consent of instructor.

C. Applied Politics

244 THE POLITICAL FILM

The great and enduring political questions
presented in fiction movies, for classroom
discussion and papers. Course draws from
a library of cinema classics on videotape
to probe political arrangements, power
relationships, and the legal process.
Alternate vears.

333 BUREAUCRACY AND

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do
bureaucracies arise? What has been the poli-
tical impact of growth of bureaucracy in gov-
emmenl!' These questions, among others,
will be considered in this examination of
public bureaucracies This course is highly
recommended to students planning to take an
internship in city or county government
through the political science department.
Subject to student demand, but offered at
least once during a four-year cycle.

347 WOMEN AND POLITICS

The historical, philosophical, and practical
context and conduct of women in a variety of
political roles. This course considers both
elective and nonelective activities, and in-
cludes analyses of women's issues currently
on legislative and court agendas. Alternate
years.

448 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING

A course dealing with the general topic and
methodology of polling. Content includes
exploration of the processes by which peo-
ple's political opinions are formed, the man-
ipulation of public opinion through the uses
of propaganda, and the American response to
politics and political issues.

D. Comparative Politics

220 EUROPEAN POLITICS

A study of the political systems of Europe
with emphasis on comparison and patterns of

government. The course will review politics
in Britain, France. West Germany, the
Soviet Union, and other countries and
attempt to find underiying similarities and
differences,

326 POLITICAL CULTURES

An exploration of the "people" aspects of
political life in several countnes. The way
people interact w ith each other and w ith gov-
ernment, what they expect from the system,
how they acquire their political attitudes and
styles, and how these contribute to the type
of government. Alternate years.

438 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS

The causes and possible cures for socio-
political backwardness in Asia, Africa, and
Latin America. Alternate \ears.

E. International Relations

225 WORLD POLITICS

Why is there war? An introduction to interna-
tional relations with emphasis on the
varieties of conflicts which may grow into
war.

243 THE VIETNAM WAR

The background and context of the war,
how the United States got involved, the
military lessons, and the war's impact on
U.S. society, politics, and economy.
Alternate years.

327 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS

The study of several current areas of inlema-
tlonal tension and conflict, including rela-
tions among the United States, Soviet Union,
and China, plus the Middle East and whatev-
er new danger spots anse over time. Alter-
nate years.

439 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY

The U.S. role in the world in geographic,
strategic, tWstorical, and ideological perspec-
tives, plus an examination of the domestic
forces shaping US policy. Alternate years.

F. Special Programs

470-479 INTERNSHIPS (See index)

Students may receive academic credit for
serving as interns in structured learning
situations with a wide variety of public and
private agencies and organizations. Students
have served as interns with the Public Defen-
der's Office, the Lycoming County Court
Adminstrator, and the Williamsport City
government.

Psychology

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Current studies relate to elections — local,
state, and federal — while past studies have
included Soviet and world politics.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

PSYCHOLOGY

Professor: Hancock
Associate Professor: Berthold
Assistant Professors: Balleweg,
Ryan (Acting Chairperson)

The major provides training in both
theoretical and appHed psychology. It is
designed to meet the needs of students
seeking careers in psychology or other
natural or social sciences. It also meets
the needs of students seeking a better
understanding of human behavior as a
means of furthering individual and career
goals in other areas. Psychology majors
and others are urged to discuss course
selections in psychology with members
of the department to help insure
appropriate course selection.

A major consists of Psychology 1 10,
336, 43 1 , 432 and four other psychology
courses. Statistics also is required.

A minor in Psychology consists of
Psychology 1 1 0 and four other psycholo-
gy courses (three of which must be num-
bered 200 or above) which must be
approved by the department.

101 TOPICS

Exploration of a specific basic or applied
topic in psychology. Different topics will
be explored different semesters. Potential
topics include the psychology of disasters,
applied behavioral psychology, and organi-
zational psychology. The course is open
to elementary and advanced undergradu-
ates. No Prerequisites. One-half unit of
credit. May be repeated once for credit
with departmental permission. May not
be used to satisfy distribution or major
requirements.

1 10 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY

An introduction to the empirical study of
human and other animal behavior. Areas
considered may include: learning, personal-

ity, social, physiological, sensory, cogni-
tion, and developmental.

1 1 2 GROUP PROCESSES AND

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION
The introduction to the research and theory
from social psychology related to small-
group dynamics and interpersonal com-
munication. Topics covered will include
communication processes, interpretation of
motivation, conceptualization of individual
personalities, problem solving and lead-
ership. The first stage of the course will focus
on research and theory; the second half will
emphasize the development of skills and
techniques where students become members
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and
making a case swdy of the processes in-
volved. May term only.

1 1 6 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY

An introduction to the patterns of deviant
behavior with emphasis on cause, function,
and treatment- The vanous models for the
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are
critically examained. Prerequisite: Psychol-
ogy 110.

1 1 7 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY

A study of the basic principles of human
growth and development throughout the life
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 110.

1 18 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY

The study areas will include theories of
adolescence; current issues raised by as well
as about the '"generation of youth"; research
findings bearing on theories and issues of
growth beyond childhood, and self-
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 1 10.

224 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY

The scientific exploration of interpersonal
communication and behavior. Topics in-
clude attitudes and attitude change, attrac-
tion and communication, social perception
and social influence, prosocial and antisocial
behavior and group processes. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110.

225 INDUSTRIAL AND
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY
The application of the principles and
methods of psychology to selected industnal
and organizational situations. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor.

239 BEHAVIOR MODIHCATION

A detailed examination of the applied analy-
sis of behavior. Focus will be on the applica-
tion of experimental method to the individual
clinical case. The course will cover target-
ing, behavior, base-rating, intervention
strategies, and outcome evaluation. Learn-
ing-based modification techniques such as

contingency management, counter-
conditioning, extinction, discrimination
training, aversive conditioning, and negative
practice will be examined. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor.

333 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY

An introduction to the physiological psycho-
logist's method of approach to the under-
standing of behavior as well as the set of
principles that relate the function and orga-
nization of the nervous system to the phe-
nomena of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychol-
ogy 110 or consent of instructor.

334 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT
Psychometric methods and theory, including
scale transformation, norms, standardiza-
tion, validation procedures, and estimation
of reliability. Prerequisites: Psychology 110
and statistics.

335 HISTORY AND
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY

The growth of scientific psychology and the
theories and systems that have accompanied
its development. Prerequisite: four courses
in psychology.

336 PERSONALITY THEORY

A review of the major theories of personality
development and personality functioning. In
addition to covering the details of each
theory, the implications and applications of
each theory will be considered. Prerequisite:
Psychology 110.

337 COGNITION

An investigation of human mental processes
along the two major dimensions directed and
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec-
ognition, attention, conceptualization, prob-
lem-solving, fantasy, language, dreaming,
and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology
110.

338 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

An introduction to the empirical study of the
teaching-learning process. Areas considered
may include educational objectives, pupil
and teacher characteristics, concept learn-
ing, problem solving and creativity, attitudes
and values, motivation, retention and trans-
fer, evaluation and measurement. Prere-
quisite: Psychology 110 or consent of in-
structor.

341 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN

A review of contemporary theory and re-
search on the psychology of gender differ-
ences. The major theories and basic research
on gender differences will be covered. Spe-
cial topics include sex differences in achieve-
ment, prwer, and communication; sex-role
stereotypes; beliefs about masculinity and

Religion

femininity; and gender influences on mental
health. Prerequisite: Psychology 1 10.

431 LEARNING
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY

Learning processes. The examination of the
basic methods and pnnciples of animal and
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology
no and statistics.

432 SENSORY
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY

The examination of psychophysical metho-
dology and basic neurophysiological
methods as they are applied to the under-
standing of sensor processes. Prerequisites:
Psychology 110 and statistics.

448-449 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY

An off-campus experience in a community
setting offering psychological services, sup-
plemented with classroom instruction and
discussion- Psychology 448 covers the basic
counseling skills, while Psychology 449
covers the major theoretical approaches lo
counseling. Prerequisite: consent of in-
structor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Internships give students an opportunity to
relate on-campus academic experiences lo
society in general and to their post-
baccalaureate objectives in particular. Stu-
dents have, for example, worked in prisons,
public and private school, county govern-
ment, and for the Amencan Red Cross.

N80-N89

INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)

Independent study is an opportunity for stu-
dents to pursue special interests in areas for
which courses are not offered. In addition,
students have an opportunity to study a topic
in more depth than is possible in the regular
classroom situation. Studies in the past have
included child abuse, counseling of hospital
patients, and research in the psychology of
natural disasters.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)
Honors in psychology requires onginal con-
tributions to the literature of psychology
through independent study. The most recent
honors project was a study of the relationship
between socio-economic status and visual
versus auditory learning.

RELIGION

Professor: Guerra (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Hughes
Assistant Professor: Van Voorst

A major consists of 10 courses, in-
cluding Religion 113. 1 14, and 120. At
least seven courses must be taken in the
department. The following courses may
be counted toward fulfilling the major
requirements: Greek 221 and 222, Heb-
rew 221 and 222. History 340 and 416,
Philosophy 332, and Sociology 333.

A minor in Religion consists of one
course from Religion 110, 113, 114 and
four religion courses numbered 200 or
above.

An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical
Languages requires the completion of
Greek 221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION

Designed for the beginning student, this
course examines what it means to be reli-
gious. Some of the issues are the definition of
religion, the meaning of symbolism, con-
cepts of God. ecstatic phenomena. Specific
attention will be devoted to the current prob-
lem of cults and religious liberty.

113 OLD TESTAMENT
FAITH AND HISTORY

A critical examination of the literature w ithin
its historical setting and in the light of
archaeological findings to show the faith and
religious life of the Hebrew-Jewish com-
munity in the Biblical period, and an intro-
duction to the history of interpretation w ith
an emphasis on contemporary Old Testament
criticism and theology.

114 NEW TESTAMENT
FAITH AND HISTORY

A critical examination of the literature within
its hisloncal setting to show the faith and
religious life of the Chnslian community in
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the
historv' of interpretation with an emphasis on
contemporary New Testament criticism and
theology.

119 RELIGION AND POPULAR CULTURE

An examination of the interaction of
religion and culture in a historical per-
spective followed by a direct analysis of
the ethical and religious issues raised by
contemporary American popular culture.
Readings include artistic and social-
scientific as well as ethical and religious
approaches to popular culture.

120 DEATH AND DYING

A study of death from personal, social, and
universal standpoints with emphasis upon
what the dying may teach the living. Pnncip-
al issues are the stages of dying, bereave-

ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the reli-
gious doctrines of death and immortality.
Course includes, as optional, practical pro-
jects with terminal patients under profession-
al supervision. Only one course from the
combination 120-121 may be used for dis-
tribution.

121 AFTER DEATH AND DYING

An examination of the question of life after
death in terms of contemporary clinical stu-
dies, the New Testament resurrection narra-
tives, the Asian doctrine of reincarnation,
and the classical theological beliefs of provi-
dence and predestination. Religion 120 is
recommended but not required. Only one
course from the combination 120-121 maybe
used for distribution.

222 PROTESTANTISM IN
THE MODERN WORLD

An examination of Protestant thought and
life from Luther to the present against the
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from
the 17th century scientific revolution to
Marxism. Darwinism, and depth psycholo-
gy Special attention will be paid to the con-
stant interaction between Protestantism and
the world in which it finds itself.

223 THE BACKGROUNDS OF
CHRISTIANITY

A study of the historical, cultural, and reli-
gious background of the formation of Christ-
ianity and the antecedents of Chnstian belief
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in
Hellenism.

224 JUDAISM AND ISLAM

An examination of the rise, growth, and ex-
pansion of Judaism and Islam with special
attention given to the theological contents of
the literatures of these religions as far as they
are normative in matters of faith, practice,
and organization. Also, a review of their
contributions to the spiritual heritage of man-
kind.

225 ORIENTAL RELIGION

A phenomenological smdy of the basic con-
tent of Hinduism, Buddhism, and Chinese
Taoism with special attention lo social and
political relations, mythical and aesthetic
forms, and the East- West dialogue.

226 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY

A study of the role of archaeology in recon-
structing the world in which the Biblical
literature originated with special atlenlion
given to archaeological results that throw
light on the clarification of the Biblical texl.
Also, an introduction to basic archaeological
method and a study in depth of several repre-
sentative excavations along with the artifacts
and material culture recovered from different
historical periods.

Sociology-Anthropology

in HISTORY AND THEOLOGY OF THE
EARLY CHURCH

An examination of the life and theology
of the church from the close of the New
Testament to the fifth century. Special
attention will be given to the struggles
of the church with heretical movements,
the controversies concerning the person
and nature of Christ, and the encounter
of the church with the Roman Empire.

228 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST
A study of the history and culture of Mesopo-
tamia, Anatolia, Syria-Palestine, and Egypt
from the rise of the Sumerian culture to Alex-
ander the Great. Careful attention will be
given to the religious views prevalent in the
ancient Near East as far as these views in-
teracted with the culture and faith of Biblical

230 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION

A study into the broad insights of psychology
in relation to the phenomena of religion and
religious behavior. The course concentrates
on religious experience or manifestations
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will
be sought to questions such as: What does it
feel like to be religious or to have a religious
experience? What is the religious function in
human development? How does one think
psychologically about theological problems?

331 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS

A study of Christian ethics as a normative
perspective for contemporary moral prob-
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of
law and religion, decision making in the field
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc-
tion of society in a planetary civilization,

332 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS

An examination of the approach of religion
and other disciplines to an issue of current
concern; current topics include the theologic-
al significance of law. the ethics of love, and
the Holocaust. The course may be repeated
for credit if the topic is different from one
previously studied.

337 BIBLICAL TOPICS

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics in-
clude prophecy, wisdom literature, the Dead
Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus, Pauline
theology, Judaism and Christian origins,
redaction criticism — the way the Synoptic
Gospels and John give final form to their
message. Course will vary from year to year
and may be taken for credit a second time
if the topic is different from one previously
studied.

341 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES

A study of the theological significance of
some contemporary intellectual develop-
ments in Western culture . The content of this
course will vary from year to year. Subjects
studied in recent years include the theologic-
al significance of Freud, Marx, and Nietz-
sche; Christianity and existentialism; theolo-
gy and depth psychology; the religious
dimension of contemporary literature.

342 THE NATURE AND MISSION
OF THE CHURCH

A study of the nature of the Church as "The
People of God" with reference to the Biblic-
al, Protestant, Orthodox, and Roman Catho-
lic traditions.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Interns in religion usually work in local chur-
ches under the supervision of the pastor and a
member of the faculty.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
(See index)
Current study areas are in the Biblical lan-
guages. New Testament theology, compara-
tive religions, and the ethics of technology.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)
A recent project was on the theology of hope
with reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch
and Alfred Nonh Whitehead.

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY

Professor: Wilk (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Jo
Assistant Professor: Strauser

The Sociology/Anthropology Depart-
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both
tracks introduce the students to the fun-
damental concepts of the discipline, and
both tracks prepare the student for
graduate school.

Track I emphasizes the theoretical
aspects of sociology and anthropology.
Track II emphasizes the application of
sociology and anthropology to human
services.

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology re-
quires the core course sequence 110,
1 14, 229, 444, and 447 and three other

courses within the department with the
exception of 115, 222, 223, 225, 440.
and 443. Religion 226 may also be
counted toward the major.

Track II — Human Services in a Socio-
Cultural Perspective requires: Sociolo-
gy-Anthropology 110, 222, 229, 443,
444, and 447. In addition, students must
select two courses from among the fol-
lowing: Sociology-Anthropology 220,
221, 227, 228, 300, 334, and 335. Stu-
dents are also required to choose two
units from the following courses:
Psychology 110, Psychology 224, Eco-
nomics 224, and Political Science 333.
Recommended courses: Accounting
110, Accounting 226, Spanish 111,
Spanish 112, History 126, and Philoso-
phy 334.

Majors in both tracks are encouraged
to participate in the internship program.

A minor in Sociology and Anthropolo-
gy consists of Sociology-Anthropology
110 and four other sociology-
anthropology courses (three of which
must be numbered 220 or above) which
must be approved by the department.
Sociology-Anthropology courses 115,
223, 225, 339, and 440 cannot be
counted toward this minor.

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY

An introduction to the problems, concepts,
and methods in sociology today, including
analysis of stratification, organization of
groups and institutions, social movements,
and deviants in social structure.

1 14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY
An introduction to the subfields of anthropo-
logy; its subject matter, methodology, and
goals. Examination of biological and cultural
evolution, the fossil evidence for human
evolution, and questions raised in relation to
human evolution. Other topics include race,
human nature, primate behavior, and prehis-
toric cultural development.

1 15 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM

An introduction to the role of law enforce-
ment, courts, and corrections in the adminis-
tration of justice; the historical development
of police, courts, and corrections; jurisdic-
tion and procedures of courts; an introduc-
tion to the studies, literature, and research in
criminal justice; careers in criminal justice.

Sociology-Anthropology

220 MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY

The history, structure, and functions of mod-
em American family hfe. emphasizing dat-
ing, courtship, factors in marital adjustment,
and the changing status of family members.
Prereijuisiie: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10
or consent of instructor.

221 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY

A multidisciplinary approach to the study of
the constellation of factors that relate to luve-
nile delinquency causation, handling the
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and
community responsibility. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of
instructor.

222 INTRODUCTION TO
HUMAN SERVICES

The course is designed for students interested
in learning about, or entenng. the human
services profession. It will review the his-
tory, the range, and the goals of human ser-
vices together with a survey of various
strategies and approaches to human prob-
lems. It will include practical discussions of
social behavioral differences as they relate to
stress and conflict in people's lives. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 andlor
Psychology 1 10 or consent of instructor.

223 INTRODUCTION TO
LAW ENFORCEMENT

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law
of crimes, elements in crime, analysis of
cnminal investigation, important case law.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115
or consent of instructor.

224 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES
The concept of community is treated as it
operates and affects individual and group
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set-
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic
institutions and problems of modem city life.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110
or consent of instructor.

225 INTRODUCTION TO
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION

This course is designed for advanced crimin-
al justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an
in-depth study of detection and investigation
of major crimes. Particular attention is
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal pa-
rameters of evidence and interrogation, and
proseculory procedures. Prerequisite:
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of
instructor. Will not be counted toward the
sociology/anthropology major.

226 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS

An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and
reactions to social movements with focus on
contemporary social movements. Prere-

quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 lOor con-
sent of instructor.

227 SOCIAL PROBLEMS

The course examines the causes, characteris-
tics, and consequences of social problems in
America from diverse socio-cultural pers-
pectives. Topics discussed typically include
crime, urban cnses, family disorganization,
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and
other related issues. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.

228 AGING AND SOCIETY

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of
the aged as individuals and as members of
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables:
health, housing, socio-economic status, per-
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social par-
ticipation. Sociological, social psychologic-
al, and anthropological frames of reference
utilized in analysis and description of aging
and its relationship to society, culture, and
personality.

229 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY

An examination of cultural and social anthro-
pology designed to familiarize the student
with the analytical approaches to the diverse
cultures of the world. The relevancy of cultu-
ral anthropology for an understanding of the
human condition will be stressed Topics to
be covered include the nature of primitive
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con-
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the
individual and culture, the social patterning
of behavior and social control, an anthropo-
logical perspective on the culture of the Un-
ited States.

300 CRIMINOLOGY

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions
under which criminal laws develop: etiology
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including
explanation of statistical distribution of cri-
minal behavior in terms of time, space, and
social location. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.

33 1 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN

A sociological examination of the role of
women in American society through an
analysis of the social institutions which
affect their development. Role-analysis
theory will be applied to the past, present,
and future experience of women as it relates
to the role options of society as a whole.
Students will do an original research project
on the role of women. Prerequisite: Sociolo-
gy-Anthropology 1 10. Alternate years.

332 INSTITUTIONS

Introduces the student to the sociological
concept of social institution, the types of
social institutions to be found in all societies,

and the interrelationships between the social
institutions within a society. The course is
divided into two basic pans: I . That aspect
which deals with the systematic organization
of society in general, and 2. The concentra-
tion on a particular social institution: econo-
mic, political, educational, or social welfare.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110
or consent of instructor.

333 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION

An examination of the major theories of the
relationship of religion to society and a sur-
vey of sociological studies of religious be-
havior. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.

334 RACIAL AND
CULTURAL MINORITIES

Study of racial, cultural, and national groups
within the framework of American cultural
values. An analysis will include histoncal.
cultural, and social factors underlying ethnic
and racial conflict. Field trips and individual
reports are part of the requirements for the
course. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.

335 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY
Introduction to psychological anthropology,
its theories and methodologies. Emphasis
will be placed on the relationship between
individual and culture, national character,
cognition and culture, culture and mental
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: Sociolo-
gy-Anthropology 229 or consent of instruc-
tor. Offered at least once every three years.

336 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS

The course will familiarize the student with
the wealth of anthropological data on the
religions and world views developed by
primitive peoples. The functions of primitive
religion in regard to the individual, society,
and various cultural institutions will be ex-
amined. Subjects to be surveyed include
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit pos-
session, the cultural use of dreams, and re-
vitalization movements. Particular emphasis
will be given to shamanism, transcultural
religious experience, and the creation of
cultural realities through religions. Both a
social scientific and existentialist perspective
will be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

337 THE ANTHROPOLOGY
OF AMERICAN INDIANS

An ethnographic survey of native North
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such
as the Iroquois. Plains Indians. Pueblos.
Kwakiutl, and Netsilik. Changes in native

Sociology-Anthropology

lifeways due to European contacts and Un-
ited Slates expansion will be considered. Re-
cent cultural developments among American
Indians will be placed in an anthropological
perspective . Offered at least once every three
years.

338 LEGAL AND POLITICAL
ANTHROPOLOGY

The course is designed to familiarize the stu-
dent with the techniques of conflict resolu-
tion and the utilization of public power in
primitive society as well as the various
theories of primitive law and government.
The rise of the state and an anthropological
perspective on modem law and government
will be included. The concepts of self-
regulation and social control, legitimacy,
coercion, and exploitation will be the orga-
nizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.

339 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM

Nature and history of punishment, evolution
of the prison and prison methods w ith emph-
asis on prison community, prison
architecture, institutional programs, inmate
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails,
reformatories, prison organization and admi-
nistration, custody, and discipline. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115.

440 PROBATION AND PAROLE

A course designed for the advanced criminal
justice major. While the course concerns the
study of probation and parole as parts of the
criminal justice system and their impact on
the system as a whole, the pnmary emphasis
is the impact on the offender. Particular
attention is given to diagnostic report writing
on offenders, pre-sentence investigation,
offender classification, and parole planning.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115
and 339. Alternate years.

441 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION

An analysis of stratification systems with
specific reference to American society. The
course will include an analysis of poverty,
wealth, and power in the United Stales. Par-
ticular attention will be given to factors
which generate and maintain inequality,
along with the impact of inequality on the
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor.

443 HUMAN SERVICES

IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS
The course examines the organizational and
conceptual context within which human ser-
vices are delivered in contemporary society.
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic
communities, mental hospitals, and other

human service institutions. The methodolo-
gy of'fieldwork will be explored so as to
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural
dimensions of helping environments and re-
lationships. Prerequisite : Sociology-
Anthropology 110 or Sociology-
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor.
Alternate years.

444 SOCIAL THEORY

The history of the development of sociolo-
gical thought from its earliest philosophical
beginnings is treated through discussions and
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologic-
al thought since the time of Comte. Prere-
quisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 or con-
sent of instructor.

445 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY

The history of the development of anthropo-
logical thought from the 18th century to the
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo-
logical thought since 1850. Topics include
evolutionism, historical -particularism,
cultural idealism, cultural materialism, func-
tionalism, structuralism, and ethnoscience.
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 229
or consent of instructor. Offered at least
once every three years.

447 RESEARCH METHODS IN

SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY

Study of the research process in sociology-
anthropology Attention is given to the pro-
cess of designing and administering research
and the application of research. Differeni
methodological skills are considered, includ-
ing field work, questionnaire construction,
and other methods of data gathering and the
analysis of data. Prerequisite: Sociology-
Anthropology 1 10 and Mathematical 103 or
consent of instructor.

448-449 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY

Introduces the student to a practical work
experience involving community agencies in
order to effect a synthesis of the student's
academic course work and its practical ap-
plications in a community agency. Specifics
of the course to be worked out in conjunction
with department, student, and agency. Pre-
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or
consent of instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index)

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically
work off campus with social service agencies
under the supervision of administrators.
However, other internship experiences, such
as with the Lycoming County Historical
Museum, are available. Interns in criminal
justice work off campus in criminal justice
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob-
ation and parole departments, under the su-
pervision of administrative personnel.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY
{See index)
An opportunity to pursue specific interests
and topics not usually covered in regular
courses. Through a program of readings and
tutonals, the student will have the opportun-
ity to pursue these interests and topics in
greater depth than is usually possible in a
regular course.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS
(See index)

THEATRE

Professor: Falk (Chairperson)
Associate Professor: Allen
Part-time Instructor: Clark
Theatre Technician: Downing

The major consists of eight courses:
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concen-
tration in acting, directing, or design is
possible. In addition to the course re-
quirements, majors are expected to par-
ticipate actively in Arena Theatre pro-
ductions. Majors are urged to include
courses in art, music, psychology, and
English, or other areas of special in-
terest.

Three minors are available in the
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre
History and Literature consists of Thea-
tre 100, 332, 333, 335, and 400. The
following courses are required to com-
plete a minor in Performance: Theatre
100, 140, 226, 334, 336, and either 332
or 333, To obtain a minor in Technical
Theatre, a student must complete
Theatre 100, 148, 228, 338, and 420 or
430.

The fine arts distribution requirement
may be satisfied by selecting any two of
the following recommended courses;
Theatre 100, 1 10, 140, 148, 332, 333 or
other courses with the consent of the in-
structor.

100 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE

Designed as a comprehensive introduction to
the aesthetics of theatre. From the spectator's
point of view, the nature of theatre will be
explored, including dramatic literature and
the integral functioning of acting, directing,
and all production aspects.

Theatre

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO FILM

A basic course in underslanding the film
medium. The class will mvestigate film tech-
nique through lectures and by viewing regu-
lar weekly films chosen from classic, con-
temporary, and experimental short films.

135-136 INTRODUCTION TO DANCE I
AND II
An introduction to the techniques of
basic movement and interpretation in
ballet, jazz, and modern dance. Classes
include improvisation and choreography.
Prerequisite for Theatre 136: Theatre IJ5
or consent of instructor. One-half unit
of credit each. Not open to students who
have received credit for Music 1 35- 1 36
or Music 235-236.

137 HISTORY OF THE DANCE I

A survey of classical ballet from the
Ballets de cour of 17th century France
to the present with emphasis on the
contributions of Petipa, Fokien, Cec-
chetti, and Balanchine. One-half unit of
credit. Not open to students who have
received credit for Music 13 7 or 138.

138 HISTORY OF THE DANCE II

A survey of the forms of dance, e.xclud-
ing classical ballet, as independent works
of art and as they have reflected the history
of civilization from primitive times to the
present. Prerequisite: Theatre 137 or
consent of instructor. One-half unit of
credit. Not open to students who have
received credit for Music 137 or 138.

140 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING

An introductory study of the actor's
preparation with emphasis on developing
the actor's creative imagination through
improvisations and scene study. Pre-
requisite: Theatre 100.

148 INTRODUCTION TO
PLAY PRODUCTION
Stagecraft and the various other aspects of
play production are introduced. Through
material presented in the course and labora-
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the
student will acquire experience to produce
theatrical scenery.

226 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING

An introductory study of the function of the
director in preparation, rehearsal, and per-
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing
the student's ability to analyze scripts, and
on the development of the student's imagina-
tion. Prerequisite: Theatre 140.

228 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT

An introduction to the theatre with an emph-
asis on stagecraft. Productions each semester
serve as the laboratory to provide the practic-
al experience necessary to understand the
material presented in the classroom. Prere-
quisite: Theatre 148 or consent of instructor.

231 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES
OF PLAY PRODUCTION

A detailed consideration of the interrelated
problems and techniques of play analysis,
production styles, and design. Offered su/n-
mer only.

232 FUNDAMENTALS OF MAKEUP
Essentials of stage makeup: straight, charac-
ter, special types. Effects of light on makeup
are included. Prerequisite: Theatre 148.
One-half unit. .Alternate years.

233 ADVANCED MAKEUP

Advanced techniques in makeup design.
Three dimensional and prosthetic makeups
are included, with emphasis on nonrealistic
and nonhuman forms Prerequisite: Theatre
232. One-half unit. .Alternate years.

235-236 INTERMEDIATE DANCE I AND II
Studies of the techniques of basic move-
ment and interpretation in ballet, jazz
and modern dance at the intermediate
level. Classes include improvisation and
choreography. Prerequisite for Theatre
235: Theatre 136 or consent of instructor.
Prerequisite for Theatre 236: Theatre 235
or consent of instructor. One-half unit
of credit each. Not open to students who
have received credit for Music 135-136
or Music 235-236.

332 HISTORY OF THEATRE 1

A detailed study of the development of
theatre from the Greeks to the Restoration.
Alternate years.

333 HISTORY OF THEATRE II

The history of the theatre from 1660. .Alter-

334 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: ACTING
Instruction and practice in character analysis
and projection with emphasis on vocal and
body techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 140,

335 THEORIES OF THE
MODERN THEATRE

An advanced course exploring the philo-
sophical roots of the modem theatre from the
birth of realism to the present and the influ-
ences on modem theatre practice. Selected

readings from Nietzsche. Marx. Jung.
Freud. Whitehead. Kierkegaard. Sartre.
Camus, Antoine. Copeau. Stanislavski,
Shaw, Meyerhold, Artaud, Brecht. Brook.
Grolowski. Alternate years.

336 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: DIRECTING
Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to
function in preparation and rehearsal Prac-
tical experience involves the directing of two
one-act plays from the contemporary theatre.
Prerequisite: Theatre 226.

337 PLAYWRITING AND
DRAMATIC CRITICISM

An investigation of the techniques of play-
writing w ith an emphasis on creative w riting.
culminating in a written one-act play, plus an
historical survey of dramatic criticism from
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon
developing the student's ability to write re-
views and criticism of theatrical productions
and films. Alternate years.

338 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO:
LIGHTING DESIGN

The theory of stage and lighting design w ith
emphasis on their practical application to the
theatre . Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent
of instructor.

400 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA

An intensive and detailed analysis of the
plays and related works, including criticism
of great authors, that have shaped world
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis of
interest of students and faculty. At times,
more than one author will be treated in a
term. Ibsen, Brecht. Moliere. Williams.
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted to-
ward English major with consent of English
Department.

420 ADVANCED STUDIO:
COSTUME DESIGN

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele-
ments of design, planning, production, and
constmction of costumes for the theatre. Stu-
dents will participate in the design of a pro-
duction. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or con-
sent of instructor.

430 ADVANCED STUDIO:
PROPERTIES DESIGN

The theory of properties design for the stage ,
including the production of specific prop-
erties for staging use. Elements of design,
fabrication, and the construction of prop-
erties employing a variety of materials and
the application of new theatrical technology.
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of in-
structor.

Women 's Studies

440 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING

Preparation of monologues and two-
character scenes, contemporary and classic-
al The student will appear in major campus
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 334.

446 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING

Emphasis will be placed on the student's
ability to produce a major three-act play from
the script to the stage for public performance.
Prerequisite: Theatre 336.

448 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN

Independent work in conceptual and practic-
al design. The student will design one full
production as his major project. Prere-
quisites: Theatre 22S or 338 and consent of
instructor.

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See mde.\)

Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres
such as the Guthrie Theatre, Minneapolis,
and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival.

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY

(See index)
Some recent independent studies have been
the roles of women as characters in drama,
scene design, and lighting design for an Are-
na production.

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS

(See index)
A typical study could be the writing and
production of an original play.

THEATRE PRACTICUM

Students may receive academic credit for
supervised participation in the various
aspects of technical production, rehearsal,
and performance of the Theatre Depart-
ment's major presentations in the Arena
Theatre. Credit for Theatre Practicum is
earned on a fractional basis. Students may
register for one-half semester hour course
credit for active participation in a major pro-
duction in the designated areas of technology
and performance, limited to one semester
hour credit per semester and eight semester
hours over four years. Theatre Practicum
credit may not be used to satisfy distribution
requirements in Fine Arts. Students may not
register for Theatre Practicum while taking
Theatre 100 (Introduction to Theatre) or
Theatre 148 (Play Production) without per-
mission of the instructor. When scheduling,
students should register for Theatre Practi-
cum in addition to the normal four academic
courses. Because students may not be cast or
assigned duties in time to meet the drop/add
deadline, late registration for Theatre 160
and 161 (Technical Theatre). (Rehearsal and
Performance) will be permitted without
penalty.

160 TECHNICAL THEATRE PRACTICUM

Participation in a major production of the
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow-
ing technical areas: scene construction,
scene painting, lighting, sound, properties,
costume, make-up. A minimum of 50 hours
is required. May be repeated for credit. One-
half credit hour. Prerequisite: Consent of
instructor.

161 REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE
PRACTICUM

Participation in a major production of the
Arena Theatre in one or more of the follow-
ing rehearsal and performance areas: acting
in a major or minor role, stage manager,
director, assistant director, choreographer.
A minimum of 50 hours is required. May be
repeated for credit. One-half hour credit.
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor.

WOMEN'S STUDIES

Professor: Jensen
(Coordinator)

Although a major in Women's Studies
is available only under the policies
regarding Individual Interdisciplinary
Majors (see p, 8), an established minor
in Women's Studies is provided. Courses
required for the minor are:

History 310: Women in History
English 334: Women and Literature
Psychology 341: Psychology of Women
Art 339: Women in Art

With the approval of the coordinator,
one of the four courses may be satisfied
with Political Science 347: Women in
Politics, with an appropriate special
course, or with an independent studies
project. To receive credit for a minor in
Women's Studies, a student must main-
tain at least a 2.0 average in courses
taken for that minor.

1987 Nobel Peace Prize recipient Elie Wiesel delivered the 19X7 commencemeni address at
Lycoming. Dr. Wiesel received an honorary doctor of humane letters degree.

Student Services

ADMINISTRATION

The program of student services at
Lycoming is administered by the Office
of Student Services. It is designed to
respond to a diversity of student needs.
Professional staff members are assigned
the specific responsibihties of:

— career counseHng and placement;

— residence life;

— student activities;

— religious life;

— health services;

— safety and security;

— student orientation;

— judiciary-student conduct

All members of the staff are available
to counsel and advise individual stu-
dents.

PERSONAL COUNSELING

Members of the staff of the Office
of Student Services are qualified and
available to provide non-therapeutic
assistance to students with adjustment
problems. A full time counseling psy-
chologist provides short term therapy for
students needing assistance in the areas
of emotional/mental health and substance
abuse. Continuing therapy is available
through referrals to public agencies and
private clinicians in the Williamsport
community. Financial arrangements for
these referral services are made directly
by the student with the agency and/or
individual clinician involved.

CAREER DEVELOPMENT
SERVICES

The Career Development Center pro-
vides services which are designed to help
students identify their abilities and in-
terests, set realistic career goals, and
plan academic programs to meet these
goals. Counseling for Lycoming stu-
dents begins in the freshman year.

In addition to individual guidance, the
center maintains a library on specific
careers, employment outlooks, and
career trends. Services offered by the
center include:

— individual counseling;

— DISCOVER a computer assisted
career guidance system provides in-
formation to students about themselves
and the world of work;

— SHARE (Students Having a Real
Experience), a program in which stu-
dents observe and work with a profes-
sional in the field;

— placement services to aid seniors in
implementing their career plans;

— assistance to students in securing
internships, summer employment, and
part-time employment;

— speaker's program which brings
professionals from a variety of careers to
campus seminars:

— video-cassette programs relating to
job skills and career information;

— microfiche copies of graduate- and
professional-school catalogs for the Un-
ited States and abroad.

RESIDENCE HALLS

Single students under 23 years of age
who do not live at the home of their
parents or guardians are required to live
in residence halls and eat in the dining
room. All new resident students are
forwarded a room-agreement form to
sign after confirmation of their admis-
sion to Lycoming. The agreement is
renewed each spring.

Resident students assume responsibility
for their rooms and furnishings. The
College reserves the right to enter and
inspect any room for reasons of damage,
health, or safety, and to search any room
when there is reason to believe a vio-
lation of College rules or the law is
occurring or has occurred. Charges are
assessed for damage to rooms, doors,
and furniture. Whenever possible, dam-
age to residence hall property will be
charged to the person or persons directly
responsible. When damage occurs to
common living areas of the residence
halls (lounges, stairwells, lobbies, hall-
ways, or bathrooms) are clearly the result
of negligence, carelessness, malicious
intent to destroy, or theft, residents
of the floor or building will be assessed
for their share of the repair and/or
replacement costs. Damage and breakage
occurring in a room will be the responsi-

bility of students occupying the room.

Residence halls are not available for
occupancy during the vacation periods.
Quiet hours are for study purposes and
are established by the Office of Student
Services. They are published in the
Student Handbook and posted on bulletin
boards. Residence Hall Councils, which
share responsibility for developing and
monitoring regulations, may vote to
extend these hours. Room visitation, by
members of the opposite sex, is per-
mitted in the halls under conditions
established by the College.

Resident Advisors are available on
student floors to assist with any problems
which might arise, as well as, offer
activities for students to get involved in.
These are undergraduate students who
are hired by the College to help provide
a good living environment for all students.

STUDENT ACTIVITIES

Student Activities offers assistance
and advice for all campus programs
and student organizations. Through the
efforts of the Campus Activities Board
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for
all facets of the student population.
C.A.B. works to create an atmosphere
which best serves the social and recre-
ational needs of the students. Student
Activities is also responsible for Leader-
ship Training and the Student Orientation
Staff; in addition, it provides support
and direction for student government,
the Interfraternity and Panhellenic Coun-
cils and the retention program.

RELIGIOUS LIFE

The United Campus Ministry, staffed
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman
Catholic Priest, provides a wide range of
activities in support of the religious lives
of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming
provides worship services, service pro-
jects, social occasions, retreats, study
opportunities and personal counseling.
The chaplains are an integral part of
campus life and are available to students
for a variety of situations in which they
might need support, counsel or direction.

HEALTH SERVICES

Normal medical treatment by the
health service staff at the College is
provided without cost to the student.
During the fall and spring semesters, the
College maintains an outpatient service
in Rich Hall. It is staffed witli a reg-
istered nurse five days a week from 8:00
a.m. to 4:30 p.m. The College physician
is available for one hour each day,
Monday through Friday. At other times,
emergency care is available at the emer-
gency rooms of Williamsport and Divine
Providence Hospitals, located a short
distance from the campus.

Medical service charges paid by the
student are: emergency room and emer-
gency room physician's charges, special
medications. X-rays, surgery, care for
major accidents, immunizations, exami-
nations for glasses, physician's visits
other than in the health service, referrals
for treatment by specialists, special
nursing services and special services.

Entering students must provide basic
health information to the College between
the time of admission and the beginning
of classes of the term to which they are
admitted. Information provided by the
student and his/her physician is con-
fidential and is available only to health
service staff and the dean of student
services.

All students are required to carry
accident-sickness medical insurance. Pre-
paid medical insurance is a requirement
for participation in intercollegiate
athletics. Lycoming College does offer
a student plan that is voluntary and at
the students' expense.

STUDENT ORIENTATION

New students at Lycoming are re-
quired to attend one of three summer
orientation sessions with at least one
parent before they enroll in the fall. The
purpose of the program is to acquaint
new students and their parents with the
College more fully so that new students
begin their Lycoming experience under
the most favorable circumstances. In
addition, all new students are required

to attend a two day orientation program
which is held immediately prior to the
beginning of the fall semester. Infor-
mation on orientation is mailed to
new students after they confirm their
admission.

SAFETY AND SECURITY

The department strives to maintain
an environment that is free of unneces-
sary hazards and disruptions. This
responsibility includes the enforcement
of Lycoming College rules, regulations,
and policies. Security personnel are
scheduled on an around-the-clock basis.
An emergency telephone line, extension
#491 1 is always monitored to respond to
serious events on campus. Telephone
extension #4604 is used to handle general
security concerns.

The office of Safety and Security
solicits the cooperation of the entire
College community in reporting unsafe
conditions and suspicious activity on
Lycoming College campus.

Other services provided by the depart-
ment are: First aid and ambulatory
medical transportation, emergency
maintenance referral, an escort service,
guest and parking registration, and the
dissemination of telephone and general
information to the public.

STANDARDS OF CONDUCT

Lycoming students are expected to
accept responsibilities required of adults.
The rights of ever\' member of the Col-
lege community are protected by estab-
lished regulations. Although the accept-
ance of the College's standards of be-
havior is an individual responsibility, it
also calls for group responsibility. Stu-
dents should influence their peers to con-
duct themselves responsibly for the col-
lective good.

Students who are unable to demons-
trate that they have accepted these re-
sponsibilities or who fail to abide by
established policies may be dismissed at
any time or denied readmission for a sub-
sequent term or semester. Further, after
the conclusion of any term or semester,
the College may deny a student the pri-
vilege of attending any subsequent term
or semester when the administration
deems this to be in the best interest of the
College.

Students are given a handbook which
contains the College's official policies,
rules and regulations. These policies,
rules and regulations are part of the con-
tractual agreement students enter into
when they register at Lycoming.

Admission to Lycoming

Lycoming College welcomes appli-
cations from prospective students
regardless of age. sex, race, religion.
financial resources, color, national or
ethnic background.

HIGH SCHOOL SENIORS

High school senior applicants for
admission must complete the following
steps:

1) Submit the completed Lycoming
College Admission Application;

2) Submit the non-refundable $25.00
Admission Application Fee;

3) Provide official transcripts of all
high school and post-secondary
school studies (whether or not
completed);

4) Submit official Scholastic Apti-
tude Test (SAT), or American
College Test (ACT);

5) Submit one (1) written evaluation
form (the form is included as part
of the admission application);

6) Submit one short (200-250 word)
essay that addresses any topic that
is of personal importance to the
applicant.

TRANSFER APPLICANTS

Lycoming College considers applica-
tions from students who have attended
other post-secondary educational insti-
tutions. These applicants must be in
good academic standing and have
earned a cumulative grade point average
of at least 2.0 (on a 4 point scale) in
transferable courses at the post-
secondary institution(s) attended.

Transfer applicants must complete
each of the following steps:

1) Complete the admission process
outlined earlier for high school
seniors;

2) Provide official transcripts of all
high school and post-secondary
school studies (whether or not
completed;

3) Arrange for the Admission with
Advanced Standing (AW AS) form
to be completed by the Student
Affairs Office at the last post-
secondary school attended.

Transfer applicants who have com-
pleted a minimum of one full year (24
semester or 36 quarter hours) of
coursework which is transferable to the
College are not required to submit SAT.
PA A or ACT results.

Applicants may transfer up to 64
semester credits of lower division
coursework. and up to 32 semester
credits of upper division coursework for
a total of 96 credits. Students must com-
plete the final 32 credits of their degree
program at Lycoming College.

Additional information regarding the
transfer of college credit appears on
page 12.

ADMISSION OF OLDER-
THAN-AVERAGE STUDENTS

Lycoming College recognizes the
unique contributions of older-than-
average students to the college classroom
setting. The College also recognizes that
older-than-average candidates for admis-
sion may possess non-traditional edu-
cational backgrounds, and that the
traditional criteria utilized during the
admission evaluation process may not
always be appropriate. To that end, the
submission of SAT or ACT results are
not required for applicants who are at
least 25 years of age.

Older-than-average applicants must
demonstrate through the admission
process that their combined work
experience and formal education pre-
dicts a reasonable opportunity for
success at Lycoming College. Older-
than-average applicants must satisfy the
following application requirements to
qualify for admission consideration:

1) Submit a completed Admission
Application (with fee);

2) Provide official transcripts of
all secondary and post-secondary
studies (whether or not completed);

3) Submit official proof of secondary
school graduation, or completion
of the GED;

4) Submit a total of iwo recommen-
dations from employers and/or
former secondary or post-secondary
instructors;

5) Applicants who have attended a
post-secondary institution are
required to submit a completed
Admission with Advanced Stand-
ing (AW AS) form;

6) Participate in an Admission Inter-
view.

INTERNATIONAL APPLICANTS

Prospective students who are neither
citizens nor permanent residents of the
United States are welcome to apply for
admission.

International applicants must com-
plete each of the following steps:

1) Submit the completed Lycoming
College Admission Application;

2) Submit the completed Lycoming
College Supplemental Applica-
tion for International Students;

3) Submit the non-refundable $25.00
Admission Application Fee;

4) Provide certified true copies of
all secondary (and when applic-
able, post-secondary) transcripts,
mark sheets, diplomas and certi-
ficates in the original languages,
as well as in English (when the
originals are not in English).
Translations of non-English mate-
rials must be certified as true and
correct;

5) Submit one (1) written evaluation
(the form is included as part of the
admission application);

6) Submit one short (200-250 word)
essay that addresses any topic that
is of personal importance to the
applicant.

7) Arrange for the Admission with
Advanced Standing form (AW AS)
to be completed by the Student
Affairs Office at the last post-
secondary school attended (if
transferring from a post-secondary
school within the United States);

8) Please note that the minimum
amount required for each aca-
demic year of study (September
through April) at Lycoming Col-
lege is U.S. $14,000. Summer
living expenses (May through
August) average an additional

U.S. $2,000, and are not included
in $14,000 amount;
9) Provide proof of the ability to
read, write and speak English at
the college level as evidenced by
a TOEFL score of at least 500,
or comparable evidence of Eng-
lish language fluency;
10) International students who are
currently studying in the United
States must be "in-status" with
the United States Department of
Justice, Immigration and Natur-
alization Service. They must also
be eligible to transfer to Lycoming
College.

ADMISSION APPLICATION
FILING PERIOD

Applications for the Fall Semester
will be accepted from June 1st of the
preceding year through March 30th of
the year in which studies are to begin.
Applications for the Spring Semester are
accepted from the preceding May 1st
through October 31st. A limited number
of applications may be considered on a
space-available basis up to one month
prior to the beginning of the semester.

Applications, when complete, are
reviewed and evaluated on a rolling
basis. Generally, applicants are noti-
fied, in writing, regarding the outcome
of their applications within three weeks
following the receipt of all required
materials.

ADMISSION DECISION
CRITERIA

Admission to Lycoming College is
competitive. Applicants are evaluated
on the basis of their academic prepara-
tion, talents, and interests, as well as the
College's capacity to help them achieve
their educational objectives and career
goals.

Successful candidates for admission
have typically completed a college pre-
paratory program in high school which
includes four years of English, three
years of math, two years of foreign lan-

guage, two years of natural or physical
science, three years of social science,
and two years of academic electives.

In addition, successful admission
candidates generally place in the top two-
fifths of their high school graduating
class, and have better than average SAT,
ACT, or PAA scores, as well as a better
than average high school grade point
average.

From time to time, supplemental
materials, as well as a personal inter-
view may be required prior to the deter-
mination of admissibility.

CONFIRMATION OF INTENT
TO ENROLL AT LYCOMING

Admitted applicants must confirm
their intent to enroll for the Fall Semes-
ter no later than the preceding May 1st,
or by November Isi for the following
Spring Semester by submitting the
appropriate deposit. Non-resident, com-
muting students are required to submit
a $100 Tuition Deposit. Resident
students are required to submit the 5/00

Tuition Deposit, as well as a $100 Room
Reservation Fee. Admitted international
applicants are required to submit all
applicable deposits prior to the issuance
of the 1-20 form.

Deposits are non- refundable, after
May 1st for the following Fall Semester,
and November 1st for the following
Spring Semester.

WITHDRAWAL OF ADMISSION
OFFERS

Lycoming College reserves the right to
withdraw offers of admission when:

1) information requested as part of
the admission application process
is not provided by applicants, or
misrepresentation of fact to the
College by applicants occur dur-
ing the application process;

2) the conduct of applicants is not
in keeping with the ethical or
moral standards as set forth in
the Lycoming College Catalog or
the Lycoming College Student
Handbook.

ADMISSIONS OFFICE
LOCATION AND HOURS

Prospective students and their fami-
lies are encouraged to visit the campus
for a student-conducted tour and an
interview with an admissions counselor,
who will provide additional information
about the College and answer questions.

The Admissions Office is located on
Washington Blvd. and College Place.
For an appointment, telephone 1-800-
345-3920 or (717) 321-4026, or write
Office of Admissions, Lycoming Col-
lege, Williamsport, PA 17701. Office
hours are:

Weekdays — September through April
8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m.

— May through August

8 a.m. to 4 p.m.
Saturdays — September through April

9 a.m. to 12 noon

— May through August
Saturday appointments by request.

Rich Hall, women 's residence dormitory

Financial Matters

EXPENSES FOR

THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1990-91

The following expenses are effective
for the regular fall and spring semesters.
The College reserves the right to adjust
fees at any time. The fees for each semes-
ter are payable not later than the second
day of classes for the semester.

Per Per

Fees Semester Year

Comprehensive $5,050 $10,100

Board and Room Rent 1,825 3,650

Total $6,875 $13,750

One-Time Student Fees

Application Fee $ 25

Admissions Deposit 100

Contingency Deposit 100

Room Reservation Deposit 100

Part-Time Student Fees

Application Fee $ 25

Each Unit Course $1,280

Additional Charges

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week

per semester) $150

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50

Reregistration Fee 25

Parking Permit (for the academic yearjlO to 15
Parking Permit with Reserved Space

(for the academic year) 15 to 35

Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in

Junior Year) $350

R.O.T.C. Uniform Deposit

(Payable at Bucknell University) 75

Transcript Fee 3

Health Services Fee $100

Placement Retest Fee $25

The comprehensive fee covers the reg-
ular course load of three to four courses
each semester. Resident students must
board at the College unless, for extraor-
dinary reasons, authorization is extended
for other eating arrangements. If a dou-
ble room is used as a single room, there is
an additional charge of $380 per semes-
ter. The estimated cost for books and
supplies is up to $400 per year, depend-
ing on the course of study. Special ses-
sion (May term and summer term)
charges for tuition, room, and board are
established during the fall semester.

ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS

Application Fee — All students for
admission must submit a $25 application
fee. This charge defrays the cost of pro-
cessing the application and is nonrefund-
able.

Admission Deposit — After students
have been notified of their admission to
Lycoming, they are required to make a
SI 00 admissions deposit to confirm their
intention to matriculate. Students seek-
ing residence must submit an additional
$100 room-reservation deposit. All de-
posits are applied to the general charges
for the first semester of attendance. After
May 1, deposits are nonrefundable.

Contingency Deposit — A conting-
ency deposit of $100 is required of all
full-time students as a guarantee for pay-
ment of damage to or loss of College
property, for library and parking fines, or
similar penalties imposed by the Col-
lege. The deposit is collected along with
other charges for the initial semester.
The balance of this deposit is refunded
after all debts to the College have been
paid, either upon graduation or upon
written request submitted to the Registrar
two weeks prior to voluntary permanent
termination of enrollment at Lycoming
College.

PARTIAL PAYMENTS

For the convenience of those who find
it impossible to follow the regular sche-
dule of payments, arrangements may be
made with the College Treasurer for the
monthy payment of College fees through
various educational plans. Additional in-
formation concerning partial payments
may be obtained from the Treasurer or
Director of Admissions.

REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS
WHO WITHDRAW

Refunds of tuition and board are made
to students who voluntarily and officially
withdraw from the College while in good
standing according to the following sche-
dule for the fall and spring semesters and
the comparable period for the May and
summer terms:

Refund Charge
Period of Withdrawal % %

During the first week

of the semester 80 20

During the second and

third week 60 40

During the fourth and

fifth week 40 60

During the sixth and

seventh week 20 80

After seven weeks 0 100

No refunds are given to students who
are suspended for disciplinary reasons.

NON-PAYMENT OF
FEES PENALTY

Students will not be registered for
courses in a new semester if their
accounts for previous attendance have
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts,
and certifications of withdrawals in good
standing are issued only when a satisfac-
tory settlement of all financial obliga-
tions has been made in the Business
Office. Final grades may also be held in
some cases.

FINANCIAL AID

STUDENT FINANCIAL
ASSISTANCE

Lycoming College is committed to
helping students and families meet col-
lege costs. While some assistance is
available to students regardless of need
(merit scholarships), the primary purpose
of the College's financial aid program is
to help qualified students of limited
financial resources attend Lycoming
College. Scholarships may be awarded
on the basis of merit and/or need, while
grants are provided on the basis of
financial need. Long term educational
loans with favorable interest rates and
repayment terms are available as are
part-time employment opportunities.

Students who wish to be considered
for financial assistance should submit the
following forms as soon after January
1 as possible and no later than April 1.

1. Lycoming Financial Aid Appli-
cation (LFAA) — available from
the Office of Financial Aid.

2. Financial Aid Form (FAF) of the
College Scholarship Service (CSS)
— available from your high school/
college counselor or the Office of
Financial Aid.

3. Pennsylvania Higher Education
Assistance Agency (PHEAA) grant
application if a Pennsylvania resi-
dent — or the appropriate state
grant application form from the
state which student resides. Appli-
cations available from your high
school/college counselor or the
Office of Financial Aid.

Renewal applications are required
annually. For additional information
refer to the Lycoming College Financial
Aid Guide.

SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS

Trustee Scholarships — This scholar-
ship is a full tuition guarantee awarded
to incoming freshmen. Recipients of this
scholarship typically rank in the top ten
percent of their class and have Scholastic
Aptitude Test (SAT) combined scores of
above 1300. Students who have been
recognized as a National Merit Scholar
may also be eligible for this scholarship.

Founders Scholarships — These $5,000
scholarships are available to incoming
students. Recipients of this scholarship
typically rank in the top twenty percent
of their class and have combined SAT
scores of 1200 or above.

Valedictorian/ Salutatorian Scholar-
ship — These $4,000 scholarships are
awarded to students that graduated first
or second in their high school class
and do not qualify for the Trustee or
Founders Scholarship.

Lycoming Academic Scholarship —
Ranging in value from $1,000 to $4,000,
these scholarships may be awarded to
students that rank in the top thirty
percent of their class and have SAT
combined scores of 1000 or above.

The above scholarships are available to
eligible students regardless of need. The
scholarships are renewable providing the
student maintains at least a 3.0 cumula-
tive grade point average as a full-time
student.

Recognition Scholarships for $1,000
to $3,000 per year are awarded to Fresh-
men who have superior academic quali-
fications and who have filed the FAF but
did not demonstrate financial need as
determined by the College Scholarship
Service and were not eligible for another
Lycoming Scholarship program. This
scholarship is renewable if the recipient
maintains a 3.00 cumulative average.

Directors' Scholarships of $400 to full
tuition, depending upon financial need,
are awarded to students in the top fifth
of their secondary school class with SAT
scores of 1 100 or more. Renewal cumula-
tive is 3.00.

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of
$400 to full tuition, depending upon
financial need, are made to full-time
students who do not qualify for scholar-
ships and who have demonstrated finan-
cial need and the prospect of contributing
positively to the College community.
Renewal requires continued financial need
and satisfactory citizenship standards.

Ministerial Grants are awarded to
dependent children of United Methodist
ministers and ordained ministers of other
denominations. The grant amounts to
one-third of tuition for children of United
Methodist Ministers in the Central Penn-
sylvania Annual Conference and one-
fourth of tuition for all others. If a
student completes the FAF, this grant
will be part of the total aid award.

Minority Scholarship is a tuition
award of up to $3,000 which is available
to ethnic minority high school graduates
with a minimum high school GPA of
3.25, rank in the top 30% of their class
and have SATs of 9(X) or better. Renewal
requires a minimum 3.0 GPA as a full-
time student.

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of one-
fourth of tuition are awarded to students
preparing for the Christian ministry who
are enrolled full time and demonstrate
financial need. Students must complete
the pre-ministerial application available
through the Financial Aid Office.

Presidential Fellowships in Music are
awarded each year to candidates nomi-
nated by the Department of Music.
Auditions and interviews are conducted
annually by the Department. A tuition

stipend of $250 is awarded for each
semester the student serves as a Fellow .
The recipients are expected to fulfill
responsibilities assigned each semester by
the Department with the primary respon-
sibility being musical performance. To
apply, contact the Chairman, Depart-
ment of Music, Lycoming College.

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded
to each member of a family attending
Lycoming College on a full-time basis at
the same time. The amount is 10% of
tuition, room, and/or board paid. Each
member must be enrolled full time and
not eligible for any other financial aid
program of the College. If a student is
eligible for other Lycoming aid, the
student would receive whichever is
greater.

Applied Music Grant was established
anonymously to be used to offset music
fees for selected students taking advanced
study in piano. Selection of recipients
will be based upon talent and potential
in piano.

Art Scholarship of $ 1 ,500 is available
to each new, selected student. It is
awarded on the basis of juried competi-
tion and is open to high school juniors
and seniors and to freshman and sopho-
more college transfer students. Renewal
requires satisfactory academic progress
and recommendation of the department.

Music Scholarship of $1,000-$2,000
is available to new selected students.
Recipient should have SATs of at least
900 and rank in the top half of their
Senior Class. Audition and recommen-
dation by the department are necessary.
Renewal requires satisfactory academic
progress and recommendation of the
department.

Franklin L. Artley Scholarship is
available annually to assist a ministerial
student(s).

Sculpture Scholarship of $1,500, but
not to exceed need, is available for
students seeking a BFA in Sculpture and
who successfully complete a portfolio
review. Students must also demonstrate
financial need. Contact the Art Depart-
ment. Application must be received prior
to March 1.

Two-Year Transfer Scholarships of
$2,400 are awarded to the student trans-

ferring from each two year institution
with the best academic record. Must have
completed a two-year program or 64
credits and have at least a 3.25 cum-
ulative average. On campus interview
required. Renewable for one year if
student maintains a 3.0 cumulative
average.

United Methodist Scholarships are
awarded to full-time degree applicants
who have a cumulative average of 3.00
or better, are active in Christian activi-
ties, are an active, full member of the
Methodist Church, and have demon-
strated financial need. The awards are
normally $500 per year and the funds
are provided by the United Methodist
Church. Annual application is required.
The student must complete and file the
FAF and the scholarship forms which
are available in the Financial Aid Office.

Wyoming Conference Scholarship is
granted by Lycoming for $500 to a
student chosen by the Scholarship Com-
mittee of the Wyoming Conference.
These are renewable for three additional
years. Good academic performance and
service to the church are the criteria for
this award.

Eph and Bess Baker Scholarship for
$6,000 is available at SI ,500 per year for
four years awarded annually to a full-
time student who exhibits academic
promise and has a permanent residence
in Lycoming County. Preference will be
given, but not limited, to students who
demonstrate need for financial assistance
to attend Lycoming College. Renewal
will be contingent upon maintaining a
cumulative average of at least 3.0 on a
4.0 scale. Recipient is chosen by the
Director of Financial Aid.

Ronald Beemer Memorial Scholarship
of $350 is periodically awarded.

Mary Strong Clemins Scholarship of
$250 for a student preparing for Christian
ministry or for deaconess work or its
equivalent in the United Methodist
Church.

Mabel L. Collins Scholarship of $250
is available for a student from Hepburn
Township; otherwise, to any other worthy
student.

C. Luther Culler Memorial Scholarship
of $450 for a student is awarded based

on Scholarship.

Dewitt-Bodine Scholarship is awarded
to the highest ranked student in the
graduating class each year from Hughes-
ville High School who attends Lycoming
College. The recipient is designated by
the Hughesville Guidance Counselor.
The scholarship amount is $2,200 and
is credited at $550 per year over four
years of attendance at Lycoming. If the
student is in a three-year program (such
as Med-Tech), the award will be divided
equally over the three-years' attendance
at Lycoming.

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarship is
awarded to the highest ranked student in
the graduating class each year from Line
Mountain High School who attends
Lycoming College. The recipient is
designated by the high school's guidance
office. The scholarship is $400 per year
for up to four years' attendance at
Lycoming.

Richard W. Gieniec Memorial Scholar-
ship is available annually to a full-
time student(s) who is in good academic
standing, who has demonstrated financial
need and who has the prospect of contri-
buting positively to the college com-
munity. Preference will be given, but is
not limited to, a student(s) who meets
any or all of the following criteria:
resident of Lancaster County, Pennsyl-
vania; learning disabled, soccer player.

Beryl Kline Glenn Scholarship of $300
is periodically awarded to a deserving
student majoring in music.

Edward J. Gray is awarded to one or
more persons of good moral character,
of studious habits, making such record
in scholarship and deportment as shall
be approved by President and faculty.

David Grove and Wife Scholarship of
$200 is periodically awarded to a needy
student studying faith and ministry.

Robert I. Hamilton Grant of $600 is
available. Mr. Hamilton was a resident
of South Williamsport.

Esther M. Heefner Scholarship of
$1,650 is available to help needy and
deserving students.

Edward P. Heether Scholarship is
available to help needy and deserving
students, who are in good academic
standing.

James A. Heether Scholarship for

$500 is available based on financial need.
Priority will be given to a chemistry
major.

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholarship
for $900 is available to help defray the
tuition and expenses for the first year
only of any graduate of Cameron County
High School (formerly Emporium High
School). The selection is made by the
Superintendent of Schools, Cameron,
PA.

Elizabeth S. Jackson Scholarship is
paid annually to the full time, degree
seeking student who attains the required
rank highest in scholarship and deport-
ment in the sophomore class.

Amos Johnson Scholarship of $100 is
available for the education of a min-
isterial student of limited means.

John T. and Mary Louise Keliher
Scholarship of $200 is available for a
deserving student "from the area."

Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music
Scholarship is awarded in the ratio of
75% of the fund to financially needy
students, in satisfactory academic stand-
ing, who are majoring in music or who
are pursuing courses in vocal music,
piano, or strings, in that priority order.
Twenty-five percent of the fund is
awarded as needed, on the recommen-
dation of the Music Department Faculty,
to students, who in their opinion should
be encouraged to study privately in the
areas of voice, piano, or strings, in that
priority order.

LAMCO Scholarship (formerly the
Grit) of up to $2,250 is available for
scholarship with the following selection
priorities:

1. children and grandchildren of
employees of The Grit;

2. graduates of high schools of the
city of Williamsport; and

3. graduates of high schools of Ly-
coming County.

Doris Lennon Scholarship of $1,800
is available to help dedicated young
students preparing for church work in
need of financial assistance.

The Lycoming County Scholarship is
an endowed scholarship which provides
interest annually to be awarded to stu-
dents whose permanent residence is in

Lycoming County. Preference will be
given to entering freshmen who demon-
strate financial need. Recipients will be
selected by the Director of Financial Aid.

Eva Rupert McKelvy Memorial Schol-
arship of $100 is available to help a
worthy Christian girl.

Mary Housenick Miller Scholarship is
given to a Lycoming student majoring in
History (preferably American History)
with a preference to an individual who
has attained at least sophomore status.
The scholarship will continue until
graduation subject to concurrence from
the History Department. Selection prefer-
ence will be given but not limited to
deserving students who demonstrate
financial need.

James E. and Bernadine Decker Nan-
carrow Scholarship is to be awarded
annually to a student(s) in good academic
standing with demonstrated financial
need. Preference may be given to Lycom-
ing County students.

Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholarship
of $800 is available to assist young
students entering Christian work with
preference given to students from the
Warriors Mark and Tyrone, PA areas.

Ada Remely Memorial Scholarship is
an award available to a currently enrolled
female member of the Junior Class
having completed 80 credit hours with at
least a 3.0 cumulative average and who
demonstrates financial need of at least the
regular tuition rate. Applications are
available in the Financial Aid Office in
February and are due in March. The
award is normally $500 based on current
earnings of the scholarship endowment.

Mort Rauff Memorial Scholarship
Fund provides annual interest which is
awarded to a deserving full-time student
who is in good academic standing. Prefer-
ence is given to but not limited to an
individual who demonstrates financial
need and is an active member of the
Lycoming College swimming team.

Jennie M. Rich Memorial Scholarship
of $450 is available for worthy and needy
students preparing for the Christian
ministry or deaconess or missionary
work.

Margaret Rich and Elmer B. Staats
Endowed Scholarship of up to $ 1 ,000 is

available to an academically talented
student who intends to pursue a career
in public service. Preference given, but
not limited, to individuals who have
demonstrated need.

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund provides
$1,400 in grant to financially needy
student(s) who are in satisfactory aca-
demic standing with primary preference
given to Trevorton residents and second-
ary preference given to Line Mountain
School District area students.

Mary London Russell Applied Music
Fund was established in recognition of
her outstanding service to Lycoming
College by alumni and friends during a
special Homecoming celebration in 1985.
This endowed fund provides financial
assistance to qualified, talented students
who seek advanced training in music.

Nathan A. Scheib Memorial Music
Fund provides financial assistance to
qualified, talented students for advanced
training in music. Awarded on the
recommendation of the Music Depart-
ment Faculty to students who, in their
opinion, should be encouraged to study
privately. Preference will be given to
students who have demonstrated finan-
cial need with the College.

J. Milton Skeath Memorial Scholar-
ship of $250 is available for a psychology
major.

Robert Barry Spieth Memorial Scholar-
ship is awarded to a student who demon-
strates need with preference given to a
business administration major who is an
active member of Sigma Pi. Minimum
GPA is 2.0.

Bishop D. Frederick and Betty Rowe
Wertz Endowed Scholarship is awarded
annually to a student(s) in good academic
standing with demonstrated financial
need.

Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar-
ships are awarded to a junior or senior
student at Lycoming who is in need of
financial assistance to complete his/her
degree. Preference is given to a Religion
Major. The award varies between $400
and $700 depending upon available
scholarship endowment income.

H. Merrill Winner Memorial Scholar-
ship of $400 is available periodically.

Hiram and Elizabeth Wise Scholarship

of $100 is available for a ministerial or
missionary student who, because of
present circumstances and promise of
future usefulness shall, in the judgment
of the President, be deemed worthy of
the same.

Dr. Paul E. H'itmeyer Memorial
Scholarship of $250 is available for a
student interested in education.

Donald C. Wolfe Memorial Scholar-
ship of $400 is available for a worthy
ministerial student to be selected by the
Trustees.

William Woodcock Scholarship is
paid annually to the full time, degree
seeking student who attains the required
rank second in scholarship and deport-
ment in the Sophomore class.

Raymond A. and L. Marie Zimmer-
man Scholarship of $100 is available for
the benefit of students preparing for the
Christian ministry.

FEDERAL AID

PELL Grants are awarded by the
Federal government to eligible under-
graduate students as determined by a
standard Federal formula. The grants
will range up to $2,300 for an academic
year and are based on financial need as
determined by the Federal Government
formula. Application can be made when
submitting the Financial Aid Form
(FAF), the PHEAA State Grant Appli-
cation, or by separate federal application
on forms which are available in secondary
school guidance offices or the Financial
Aid Office at Lycoming. For students
who received their first Pell Grant award
in the 1987-88 award year or thereafter,
the duration of eligibility for a Pell Grant
is limited to the full-time equivalent of
5 academic years of study if the student
is enrolled in an undergraduate degree or
certificate program of 4 years or less.

Supplemental Education Opportunity
Grants are awarded to a limited number
of undergraduate students who have
exceptional need. Priority must be given
to Pell Grant recipients. The award range
is $100 to $4,000 per year. You need to
file the FAF application to be considered
for this award.

Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship is

available to residents of Pennsylvania
who rank in the top 10 percent of their
high school class and plan to enter the
elementary or secondary teaching field.
Scholarships are for up to $5,000 and the
student must sign an agreement to teach.
More information is available from
your high school guidance counselor or
Lycoming's Financial Aid Office.

STATE AID

Pennsylvania Higher Education Assis-
tance Agency (PHEAA) Grants are

available for Pennsylvania residents
meeting the residency requirements and
financial requirements of the program.
Awards range from $100 to $2,100 per
year for up to four years. Direct appli-
cation to Harrisburg on the PHEAA
Grant application is required. The dead-
line for filing to receive consideration is
normally May 1st.

Scholars in Education A wards (SEA)
are offered by PHEAA to PA residents
who plan to teach math or science in a
Pennsylvania secondary school. Must
rank in the top fifth of your high school
class, achieve at least a 3.0 (B) average
on a 4.0 scale in math or science courses
in high school and college, and score at
least 1000 on the SATs (math must be
at least 550) or on ACT have at least 22
in English and 27 in math. Award is 50%
of annual tuition. You must agree to
teach math or science in a Pennsylvania
secondary school. If you fail to keep the
commitment the grant becomes a loan
with interest. High school seniors should
contact your guidance counselor. College
students should contact Lycoming's
Financial Aid Office.

Other State Aid may be available to
assist you at Lycoming College. Massa-
chusetts, Ohio, Delaware, Rhode Island,
and Connecticut have programs which
allow their residents to use state grants
at Lycoming. Contact your secondary
school guidance office for specific infor-
mation and application forms.

LOAN PROGRAMS

Perkins Loan (National Direct Student

Loan Program) permits a total of $9,000
to be borrowed by the undergraduate
student at a rate not to exceed $4,500 the
first two years. Preference must be given
to those who have exceptional need.
Applicants must complete the FAF
through the College Scholarship Service.
The repayment period and the interest
does not begin until six months after the
student is graduated or ceases at least
half-time enrollment. Loans bear interest
at the rate of 5070 simple interest. Repay-
ment of the principal may extend over
a ten year period with the exception that
the Program requires repayment of not
less than $30 per month.

Stafford (formerly Guaranteed Stu-
dent) Loan Program allows students to
borrow up to $2,625 as a freshman or
sophomore or up to $4,000 as a junior
or senior per academic level not to exceed
$17,250.

Currently, the Federal Government
pays the interest while the student is
enrolled at least half-time. The simple
interest rate ranges from 7-10 percent
depending upon the date you first ob-
tained a loan. Repayment usually extends
over a period of up to ten years and
begins six months after leaving school.
Applications and information are avail-
able from your bank or other lending
institutions.

PHEAA Alternative Loan of up to
$10,000 is available to students attending
a Pennsylvania school through PHEAA.
Eligibility is based on your credit quali-
fications and those of your cosigner. For
more information request the PHEAA
Help Loan Brochure or contact PHEAA,
660 Boas Street, Harrisburg, PA 17102.

PHEAA IWonsubsidized Stafford
(GSL) Loan may be available to students
attending a Pennsylvania school. The
interest rates are the same as on the
Subsidized Stafford; however, the in-
terest on the Nonsubsidized Stafford
must be paid on a quarterly basis while
the student is enrolled in school and
during the six-month grace period fol-
lowing the in-school period. Students
must not be eligible for a maximum
subsidized Stafford and must not be
packaged ith SEOG, CWS, or Perkins
Loan. The maximum loan amount is up

to $2,625 minus Stafford subsidized
eligibility for freshman and sophomore
standing and $4,000 minus Stafford
subsidized eligibility for junior and
senior standing. Minimum loan amount
is $500.

PLUS/SLS Loans are meant to pro-
vide additional funds for educational
expenses. The interest rate varies annually
but will not exceed 12%. Parents of
dependent undergraduate students or
independent undergraduates may borrow
up to $4,000 per year to a total of
$20,000. Applications and information
are available from your bank or other
lending institution.

United Methodist Student Loans are
available on a very limited basis to
students who are members of the United
Methodist Church. The maximum
amount which may be borrowed for
an academic year is $1,000 subject to
availability of funds. Information and
applications are available through the
Financial Aid Office.

EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES

Federal College Work-Study Program
(CWSP) awards provide work oppor-
tunities on campus. The program is
funded by Federal funds supplemented
by Lycoming funds. Students generally
earn $500 to $2,000 per academic year
and are normally limited to five to
twenty hours per week during periods of
regular enrollment. The purpose of the
program is to provide employment to
students who are in need of assistance to
attend college. Applicants must complete
the FAF or PHEAA Grant Application
and Lycoming's Financial Aid/Scholar-
ship Application (FASA).

Lycoming Campus Employment Pro-
gram opportunities are provided on
campus to students enrolled full time
who are not packaged with Federal
Work-Study jobs. The earnings range up
to $1,500 per year. Applicants must have
a work supervisor complete a job request
form from the Financial Aid Office.

Other Job Opportunities are frequently
available with local business firms or
persons. Contact the Career Develop-

ment Office of the College for infor-
mation on these opportunities.

OTHER AID SOURCES

Williamsport Hospital Scholarship

provides assistance to sophomore, junior,
or senior nursing students who have at
least a 2.5 cum average. Students selected
must agree to provide the Williamsport
Hospital with a minimum of twelve
months of service as an employee in the
Nursing Department for each $2,000
per year of award received. Awards of
greater than $2,000 per year require one
year of service for each year of award
received. If the student does not work for
the hospital, the award reverts to a loan.

IVon-College Aid Opportunities often
are available through family employers
or labor unions, business firms, fraternal
and religious organizations, and second-
ary schools. Contact your secondary
school guidance office for information.
Your parents should contact their em-
ployer and organizations of which they
are members for information on any
financial aid sources.

Veterans and Dependents Benefits are
available for qualified veterans and
children of deceased or disabled veterans.
Application should be made to your
nearest Veterans' Administration Office.

Reserve Officers Training Corps
(ROTC) Scholarships. Students who
participate in Army ROTC are eligible
for three, two, or one-year ROTC Schol-
arships to finance tuition, books, labora-
tory fees, and other charges with the
exception of room and board. ROTC
students may also receive $100 per
month stipend during the academic year.

Reserve Officers Training Corps
(ROTC) Stipends. Students who partici-
pate in the Army ROTC program receive
$100 per academic month of their junior
and senior years. They also receive half
of a second lieutenant's pay plus travel
expenses for a six-week advanced sum-
mer camp between junior and senior
years.

Pennsylvania National Guard. Stu-
dents participating in this program
may be eligible for scholarship, credit
programs, educational bonus, or loan

repayment. Contact a Guard unit in your
area for more information.

Tuition Exchange Grants. Lycoming
College is a member of both the Tuition
Exchange Program and the CICU Tuition
Exchange Program. These programs are
for dependent students of employees
at participating institutions of higher
education. You should contact the Tui-

tion Exchange Officer at your sponsor
institution for information regarding
sponsorship.

Education Financing Plans. The Busi-
ness Office at Lycoming provides infor-
mation about plans which enable parents
to pay college expenses on a monthly
basis through selected companies.

The Campus

Nineteen buildings sit on Lycoming's
20-acre main campus. Most buildings
have been constructed since 1950, even
though Lycoming — one of America's
50 oldest colleges and universities —
dates back to 1812. All buildings are
easy to reach from anywhere on cam-
pus. A 12-acre athletic field and football
stadium lie a few blocks north of the
main campus.

Modem buildings include the eight
residence halls, which contain clean and
comfortable single and double rooms;
the student union; and the physical
education/recreation center. Up-to-date
facilities include the library theatre, the
planetarium, the computer center, an
electronic-music studio, a photography
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com-
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal-
lery and physical education center
opened in 1980. An arts center was
renovated and opened in 1983.

RESIDENTIAL

Asbury Hall (1962) — Named in honor
of Bishop Francis Asbury, the father of
The United Methodist Church in Ameri-
ca, who made the circuit through the
upper Susquehanna District in 1812, the
year Lycoming (then the Williamsport
Academy) opened its doors.
Crever Hall (1962) — Honors Lycom-
ing's founder and first financial agent,
the Rev. Benjamin H. Crever, who
helped persuade the Baltimore Confer-
ence to purchase the school from the
Williamsport Town Council in 1848.
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the
chapters of Lycoming's national frater-
nities and other students. The self-
contained fraternity units each contain
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room.
All students share a large social area.
Forrest Hall (1968) — Honors Dr. and
Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest and Anna
Forrest Burfiendt '30, the parents and
sister of Katherine Forrest Mathers '28,
whose generosity established the memo-
rial.

Rich Hall (1948) — Honors the Rich
family of Woolrich, Pennsylvania.
Houses the health service, campus
security, mail room, and the Sara J.

Walter Lounge for commuting students.
The Academic Resource Center opened
in January. 1986, and is located in the
North Lounge on the First Floor. It is
manned by peer tutors and professional
staff during specified hours on Sunday
through Friday.

Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi-
dence hall. Honors the late J. Milton
Skeath, professor of psychology and
four-time Dean of the College from
1921 to 1967.

Wesley Hall (1956) — Honors John
Wesley, the founder of Methodism.
Williams Hall (1965) — Honors Mary
Ellen Whitehead Williams, mother of
Joseph A. Williams, of St. Marys,
Pennsylvania, whose bequest estab-
lished the memorial.

ACADEMIC

Academic Center (1968) — Probably
the most architecturally impressive
building on campus, the Center actually
is composed of four buildings: the
library, Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre
and laboratories, and the faculty office
building.

Library (1968): An active instruction
program acquaints students with
academic library strategies and supports
their specific research in each discipline
studied. Students become familiar with
traditional methods of research as well
as new information technologies utiliz-
ing computerized CD-ROM and online
searching. The collection includes more
than 160,000 volumes, approximately
1000 periodical titles, and a strong refer-
ence section suitable to an undergraduate
education. The library also serves as a
partial depository for U.S. government
publications.

Other facilities in this wing:

Art Gallery (1980): Located in the
northwest comer of the first floor
of the library, the gallery contains
exhibits year-round, including
shows of student work.
College Computer Center (1969):
Located in the lower level of the

library, the center houses a
PRIME 9755 which replaced the
DEC PDPll/70 in December
1987. The PRIME 9755 has three
315 and one 1475 megabyte disk
drives and 15 megabytes of main
memory.

Computer Graphics Center
(1986): The computer graphics
center provides the IBC Ensign
Computer for students majoring in
computer science and for those
taking graphics courses. It has 32
ports for terminals and printers, 2
megabytes of memory, and two
85 megabyte disk drives.
Nursing Skills Laboratory
(1983): Located in the lower level
of the library, it is a replica of a
modem hospital ward, complete
with 10 simulated work stations, a
nurses' station, and all the medi-
cal equipment used by nurses.
Wendle Hall (1968): Contains 21 class-
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a
computer terminal laboratory with 20
terminals available for use at present
with an expansion capability of 20
more, and spacious Pennington Lounge,
an informal meeting place for students
and faculty.

Arena Theatre and Laboratories
(1968): The 204-seat thrust-stage theat-
re is one of the finest in the region. It
includes projection facilities, scene and
costume shops, a make-up room, and a
multiple-use area known as the Down
Stage, where one-act experimental plays
are performed. The language, business,
mathematics, and physics laboratories
are situated on the upper floors. The
Detwiler Planetarium is located on the
ground floor.

Faculty Office Building: Contains

faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a

735-seat lecture hall.

Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated

1983): Contains studios, sculpture

foundry, woodshop, printmaking shop,

classrooms, lecture hall, offices. In

addition, the Career Development

Office is located in this building.

Photographic Laboratory (1984):

Located in the lower level of the Fine

Arts Center, it contains all the mate-

rials and equipment of any commer-
cial laboratory.
Mass Communication Center (1987):
The focal point of the facility is a fully
equipped, broadcast quality television
studio and control room. The building
also houses two editing rooms, a clas-
sroom, faculty offices and the student
newspaper office. The center is located
on the southeast comer of campus.
Science Building (1990): Opened this past
spring, the $8.3 million Science Building
is one of the finest undergraduate science
facilities in the East. The three-level
building totals more than 63,000 square
feet and contains state-of-the-art biology
and chemistry laboratories, lecture and
seminar rooms, a science reading area
and a greenhouse, as well as classrooms
and faculty offices.

Clarke Building (1939): — Includes
recital hall, music classrooms, practice
studios, an electronic-music studio,
faculty offices, two chapels, and the
United Campus Ministry Center.

ADMINISTRATION

Drum House: Built in 1857 as a rental
property, the Admissions House is the
oldest and smallest building on the cam-
pus. It was first occupied by a Presby-
terian parson. Founded in 1812. the
Williamsport Academy, predecessor to
Lycoming College, was likewise Pres-
byterian until 1848 when the institution
was purchased by the Methodists to
become the Williamsport Dickinson
Seminary.

The Admissions House was bought
by the College in 1931, along with
twenty-eight other dwellings and in
1940 became the President's home.
John W. Long occupied it for the
remainder of his tenure and D. Freder-
ick Wertz lived in the house from 1955
until 1965 when the President's home
was moved to 325 Grampian Boulevard.
Ine building was then converted for use
by the Fine Arts Department. In 1983,
when a new Fine Arts facility was com-
pleted, the department was relocated
and the house was vacant until 1987
when it was restored by college crafts-

men to its original Federalist design
under the supervision of Carol Baker
'60, kindly volunterred her services
during the year-long reconstruction. The
Admissions House is a gift of the W.F.
Rich Family.

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened
originally as the library, it now houses
the administrative offices, including
those for the president, dean, treasurer,
registrar, admissions, alumni affairs,
public relations, institutional advance-
ment, career development, publications,
and financial aid. It includes a reception
area, central communications, and the
printing and bulk mail office.

RECREATION

Physical Education and Recreation
Center (1980) — Includes the George
R. Lamade Gymnasium, which contains

basketball and other courts; a six-lane
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sau-
na and steam room; weight room;
offices; classrooms, and Alumni
Lounge.

Wertz Student Center (1959) — Con-
tains the main and private dining rooms,
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area,
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu-
dent organization offices, and FM radio
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick
Wertz, president of Lycoming from
1955 to 1968.

RELIGIOUS

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's
landmark, the building contains Clarke
Chapel. St. John Neumann Chapel, the
United Campus Ministry Center, and
music department studios and offices.

Academic Calendar: 1990-91

Fall semester

Bills are due August 20

Orientation of new faculty August 23

Residence halls open 8:00 a.m. for freshmen August 24

Residence halls open August 26

Faculty available for advising August 27

Classes begin first period August 28

Processing of drop/add begins August 28

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 3

Last day for drop/add September 3

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 3

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades

were recorded in Spring, May, and summer terms October 8

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades

were recorded in fall semester

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon .... October 15

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess

Classes resume first period after spring recess

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester November 6-7-8

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors

Preregistration for freshmen November 14-15-16

Last day to withdraw from courses November 19

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 20

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving November 25

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving November 26

Final examinations begin December 10

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 14

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 14

Spring semester

December 28

January 6

January
January
January
January
January

February 15
February 22
February 22
March 3
March 4

March 27-28
April 3-4
April 5

April 22
April 26
April 26

Residence halls open

Classes begin

Last day for drop/add

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades

Last day to withdraw from courses

Term ends

Residence halls close at 4 p.m

May term

. . May 5
May 6
. . May 7
. . May 7
. . May 24
. May 31
. May 31

Summer term

June 2
June 3
June 7
June 7
June 28
July 12
July 12

Special dates to remember:

Freshman convocation • August 27

All College Picnic September 1

Labor Day (classes in session) September 3

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 12-13-14

Homecoming Weekend October 5-6-7

Admissions Open House October 8

Parents Weekend November 2-3-4

Admissions Open House November 10

Thanksgiving recess November 20-25

Spring recess February 22-March 3

Honors Day April 10

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) March 29

Baccalaureate May 5

Commencement May 5

Memorial Day (no classes) May 27

Independence Day (no classes) July 4

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

See other formats